Serial Console Servers - WTI › Guides › dsm_usersguide.pdf · 2017-07-26 · No. part of WTI. 14446 Rev. D DSM Series CPM Remote Site Managers with Power - [PDF Document] (2023)

WTI Part Number 14446 Rev. D

DSM Series Serial Console Servers

CPM series remote site management with power control

Products covered:

DSM-Serie CPM-Serie

DSM-40 models, CPM-1600 models

DSM-24 models, CPM-800 models

DSM-8 models

manual

Warnings and Precautions: Installation Instructions

Safe storage

When Secure Racked units are installed in a closed rack assembly or with multiple units, further evaluation by certification authorities may be required. The following points should be considered.

1. The ambient temperature inside the rack may be higher than the room environment. The installation must be done in such a way that the airflow required for safe operation is not compromised. The maximum temperature for equipment in this environment is 60°C. The maximum permissible ambient temperature must be taken into account.

2. The installation must be done so that a dangerous stability condition is not reached due to uneven loading.

input provision

1. Check the rating on the nameplate to ensure that there is no overload in the supply circuits that could affect the surge protection and supply wiring.

2. When installing devices with a nominal voltage of 48 VDC, installation is allowed only under the following conditions:

A. Connect the device to a 48 V DC power source that is electrically isolated from the AC power source. The 48 VDC source must be connected to a 48 VDC SELV source.

B. Input wiring to the terminal block must be routed and secured in a manner to protect it from damage and strain. Do not place cables in front of sharp edges or moving parts.

C. An easily accessible disconnect device with a contact distance of at least 3 mm must be incorporated into the fixed wiring.

grounding

A reliable grounding of this device must be ensured. Particular attention should be paid to the supply connections when plugging into a power strip and not to direct connections to the branch circuit.

There are no serviceable parts inside. Authorized service personnel only

Do not attempt to service or repair this device yourself. Internal components may only be repaired by authorized personnel.

• ShockHzard-DoNotEnter

• Lithium battery CAUTION: Risk of explosion if battery is not replaced properly. Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by the manufacturer. Dispose of used batteries according to the manufacturer's instructions.

Warnings and precautions

Disconnect the power supply

If you notice any of the following events, immediately unplug the device from the outlet and contact qualified service personnel:

1. If the power cord is frayed or damaged.

2. If liquid has been spilled on the device or the device has been exposed to rain or water.

Disconnect the power supply before performing any maintenance

Before attempting to repair or remove this device, ensure that the power cords are disconnected from the power source(s).

Up to four power cords

Note that some DSM series devices have two separate power inputs and a separate power cord for each power input.

In addition, some CPM-1600 series devices have four separate power inputs and a separate power cord for each power input. Ensure that all power cords are disconnected from the power source before attempting to repair or remove the device.

Modemkabel

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only telecommunications cable rated 26 AWG or larger (eg, 24 AWG) with UL or CSA certification.

CAUTION: To reduce the risk of fire, use only 26 AWG or larger telecommunications cable.

Limited Access (CPM series only)

CPM series units are intended for installation in locations with limited access.

The materials are intended for installation in RESTRICTED ACCESS LOCATIONS.

iii

Authorizations from authorities

FCC Rules Part 15

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy. If not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, it may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this device in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference. In this case, the user must repair the damage at his own expense.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation

WARNING: Changes or modifications to this equipment not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment

Compliance with EMC, safety and R&TTE directives

The CE mark is affixed to this product to confirm compliance with the following European Community directives:

• Council Directive 2014/30/EU of February 26, 2014, on the approximation of the laws of the Member States regarding electromagnetic compatibility.

And

• Council Directive 2014/35/EC of 26 February 2014 on the harmonization of the laws of the Member States relating to electrical equipment designed for use within certain voltage limits.

Industry Canada - The EMI Information

This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

This product complies with applicable Industry Canada technical specifications

The Ringer equivalence number indicates the maximum number of devices that can be connected to a telephone interface. Termination on an interface can consist of any combination of devices, as long as the sum of the RENs of all devices is required not to exceed five.

Table of Contents

1 Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. Unit description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.1. DSM Series - Front panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1 2.2. DSM Series - Back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2.3. CPM-1600 Series - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 2.4. CPM-1600 Series - Back Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 2.5. CPM-800 Series - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 2.6. CPM-800 Series - Back Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-11 2.7. Front panel button functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12

3. Getting started. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.1. Enable DSM/CPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1 3.2. Connect your computer to DSM/CPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 3.3. Contact DSM/CPM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3.4. Connect ports and swap outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 3.5. The WMU Enterprise Management solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 3.6. The cellular modem option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6

4. Select mobile modem. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1. Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1.1. Connect the cellular antennas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1.2. Installing the SIM card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4.1.3. Format the SIM card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2 Specifying the Static Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2.1. Specify a static route when the default gateway address is known. . . . . . . . . . . 4-2 4.2.2. Specify a static route when the default gateway address is unknown. . . . . . . . . 4-3 4.3. Enable web services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5 4.4. Make sure mobile access is available. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6 4.5. Configuring Firewall/IP Tables (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7

5. Hardware installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1. Connecting the power cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1.1. Connect the DSM/CPM to your power supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1.2. Installing the Power Cord Bracket (CPM Models Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1 5.1.3. DC powered units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.2. Connecting the network cable. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 5.3. The internal modem port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.4. The cellular modem option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.5. Connecting to installation ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.6. Connection to switched outlets (CPM units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5.7. Connecting devices to the DSM/CPM serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4 5.8. emergency shutdown function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4

6. Basic operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1. Contact DSM/CPM Unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1.1. The text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6.1.2. The web browser interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6.1.3. The WMU Enterprise Management solution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Table of Contents

6. Basic operation (continued) 6.2. Connecting and disconnecting serial ports - text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.2.1. Any-to-any operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.2.1.1. Connecting Ports - Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4 6.2.1.2. Split ports - text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-6 6.2.1.3. The Port Control Screen - Web Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8 6.2.1.4. Defining Hunt Groups - Text Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 6.2.2. passive mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.2.3. buffer function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.2.3.1. Reading data from buffer mode ports - text interface. . . . . . . . . . 6-10 6.2.3.2. port buffer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11 6.2.4. modem mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6.2.5. Modem PPP mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12 6.3. Power Control - Web Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6.3.1. Plugin Control Screen - Web Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 6.3.2. Plug Group Control Screen - Web Browser Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14 6.4. Power Control - Text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.4.1. Port and Connector Status Screen - Text Interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15 6.4.2. Switch and restart commands - text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16 6.4.2.1. Apply commands to multiple plugs - text interface. . . . . . . . . . 6-18 6.5. manual operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 6.6. Logging out of command mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19 6.7. emergency shutdown function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19

7. Configuration Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.1. configuration menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1 7.2. System configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 7.2.1. Real-time clock and calendar. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 7.2.2. The invalid serial port access lock feature. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 7.2.3. protocol configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10 7.2.3.1. The configuration options for the audit log and the alarm log. . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.2.3.2. The temperature log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.2.3.3. Read, download and delete log files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11 7.2.4. security recall. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13 7.2.5. script options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14 7.2.5.1. Automated mode (CPM series devices only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17 7.2.5.2. Modem collection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18 7.2.6. Power Modulation (CPM-C Series Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19 7.3. User Accounts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 7.3.1. command access levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-20 7.3.2. Grant access to the serial port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 7.3.3. Grant access to the plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-21 7.4. Manage user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 7.4.1. View user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 7.4.2. Add user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22 7.4.3. change user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 7.4.4. Delete user accounts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-25 7.5. The plug group directory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-26 7.5.1. View login application groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 7.5.2. Add Plug Groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-27 7.5.3. Change connection application groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 7.5.4. Delete connection application groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-28 7.6. Plugin Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-29 7.6.1. The boot priority parameter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 7.6.1.1. Example 1: Change connection 3 to priority 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-31 7.6.1.2. Example 2: Change slot 4 to priority 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-32

Table of Contents

7. Configuration options (continued) 7.7. Configuring the serial interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33 7.7.1. RS232 Port Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-34 7.7.2. The configuration menu for the serial port. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35 7.7.3. Copy Parameters to Multiple Serial Interfaces (Text Interface Only) . . . . . . . . . 7-43 7.8. network configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-44 7.8.1. network parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47 7.8.1.1. Configuration parameters for cellular modems. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-55 7.8.1.2. IP tables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 7.8.2. Static route. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-56 7.8.3. DNS services. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 7.8.3.1. DNS parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 7.8.3.2. DDNS parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-57 7.8.4. SNMP Access Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-58 7.8.5. SNMP trap parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-60 7.8.6. LDAP parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-61 7.8.6.1. Add LDAP groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-63 7.8.6.2 Display LDAP Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64 7.8.6.3. Modify LDAP groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64 7.8.6.4. Delete LDAP groups. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-64 7.8.7. TACACS parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-65 7.8.8. RADIUS parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-68 7.8.8.1. Dictionary support for RADIUS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-69 7.8.9. Email message parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-71 7.9. Save parameters selected by the user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72 7.9.1. restore the configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-72

8. Restart options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1 8.1. Ping no response Reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.1.1. Added unanswered ping restarts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 8.1.2. View restart profile with no ping response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.1.3. Modify restart profile without ping response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.1.4. Delete restart profiles with no ping response. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4 8.2. Scheduled reboot. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8.2.1. Add scheduled restarts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 8.2.2. View scheduled restart actions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.2.3. Change scheduled restarts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 8.2.4. Delete scheduled restarts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

9. Alarm configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1 9.1. Overcurrent alarms (CPM-C series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 9.1.1. Overcurrent alarms - load shedding and automatic recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4 9.2. The overheating alarms. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6 9.2.1. Over temperature alarms - load shedding and automatic recovery. . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 9.3. The lost communication alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10 9.4. The Ping No Response Alert. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9.4.1. Ping No Response Notification - DSM Series Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 9.4.1.1. Specifying IP addresses without Ping response - DSM series devices. . . . . . 9-13 9.4.1.2. Configuring Ping No Response Notification - DSM Series Devices. . . . . . 9-15 9.4.2. Ping No Response Alert - CPM Series Devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16 9.5. Invalid serial port access lock alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-18 9.6 Power Cycle Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20 9.7. buffer threshold alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21 9.8. The plug current alarm (CPM-C series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23 9.9. Power loss alarm (dual power input units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26 9,10. The emergency shutdown alarm (CPM series units only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28 9.11. The alarm clock without ringtone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Table of Contents

vii

10.The status screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.1. product status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.2. The network status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1 10.3. The port status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2 10.4. The port and connection status screens (CPM series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10.5. The Connector Group Status screen (CPM series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4 10.6. Current measurement status screen (CPM-C series only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5 10.7. The event logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10.7.1. View event logs using the text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 10.7.2. View event logs via a web browser interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10.8. The diagnostic ports screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10.9. Alias Status Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 10.10. The alarm status screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 11/10. The port parameter screens. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8

11.SSH and Telnet capabilities. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.1. network port numbers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.2. SSH encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1 11.3. The Direct Connect function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11.3.1. Standard Telnet, SSH and Raw Socket protocol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11.3.2. Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 11.3.3. Connecting to a serial port using Direct Connect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 11.3.4. End a Direct Connect session. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-7 11.4. IP alias. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8 11.5. Create an outgoing Telnet connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9 11.6. Create an outgoing SSH connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-10

12.SyslogMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1 12.1. Construction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

13. SNMP traps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1 13.1. Construction: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1

14. Operation via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14.1. DSM/CPM SNMP Agent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14.2. SNMPv3 authentication and encryption. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1 14.3. Configuration via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2 14.3.1. view users. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14.3.2. Add user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14.3.3. change user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14.3.4. Delete user. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-3 14.4. Connection control via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 14.4.1. control plug. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4 14.4.2. Controlling Connection Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5 14.5. Configuring serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-6 14.6. View device status via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14.6.1. System Status - Ethernet port MAC addresses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14.6.2. connection status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14.6.3. temperature status of the device. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-7 14.6.4. alarm status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-8 14.7. Sending traps via SNMP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-9

15. Creation of web certificates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1 15.1. Create a self-signed certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 15.2. Create a signed certificate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3 15.3. Download the server private key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 15.4. Strengthen web security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5 15.5. TLS mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5

Table of Contents

viii

16.Save and restore configuration parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 16.1. Send parameters to a file. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 16.1.1. Download and save parameters via the text interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1 16.1.2. Download and save parameters via web browser interface. . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 16.2. Reset download settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-2 16.3. Restore the last saved parameters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3

17. Update DSM/CPM firmware. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 17.1. WMU Enterprise Management Software (recommended) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1 17.2. The firmware upgrade function (alternative method) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1

18. Command Reference Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 18.1. command contracts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1 18.2. command summary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-2 18.3. set of instructions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3 18.3.1. command display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-3 18.3.2. control commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-7 18.3.3. configuration commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-14

Attachments:

A. Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-1 A.1. Typical devices of the DSM series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aph-1 A.2. CPM series units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-2

B. Serial Interface Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-3 B.1. Serial port (RS232) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aph-3 B.2. DSM and CPM RJ45 serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-4

C. Connecting devices to RJ45 serial ports. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-5 C.1. Straight RJ-45 cables and twisted RJ-45 cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-5 C.2. Connecting DB-9M DTE devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-6 C.3. Connecting DB-25F DTE devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aph-7 C.4. Connecting DB-25F DCE Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-8 C.5. Connection of RJ-45 DCE devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aph-9 C.6. DX9F-NULL-RJ snap adapter. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-9

D. Customer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Apx-10

Table of Contents

List of Figures

2.1. DSM-40 Series - Forward. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.2. DSM-24 Series - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.3. DSM-8 Series Devices - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12.4. DSM-8 series devices - back side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32.5. DSM-24 series devices - rear side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32.6. DSM-40 series devices - rear side. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-32.7. CPM-1600 Series - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52.8. CPM-1600-1 Series - Back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.9. CPM-1600-2 Series - Back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-72.10. CPM-800 Series - Front. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-92.11. CPM-800-1 - Back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-112.12. CPM-800-2 - Back panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-114.1. Example of static route definition. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45.1. Terminal Block Assembly (DSM Series, DC Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-27.1. Example of boot priority 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-317.2. Boot priority example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-327,3. Network Selection Menu (Text Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-457,4. Network Selection Menu (Web Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4515.1. Web Access Parameters (Text Interface Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1B.1. RS232 (RJ45) port interface of DSM series and CPM series. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aph-3B.2. RJ11 telephone line socket (for optional internal modem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-3C.1. Straight cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-5C.2. rollover cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-5C.3. DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-6C.4. Connecting DB-9M DTE devices to DSM and CPM series devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-6C.5. DX25M-DTE-RJ snap adapter interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-7C.6. Connecting DB-25F DTE devices to DSM CPM series devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-7C.7. DX25M-DCE-RJ snap adapter interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-8C.8. Connecting DB-25F DCE devices to DSM and CPM series devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-8C.9. Connecting RJ-45 DCE devices to DSM and CPM series devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-9C.10. DX9F-NULL-RJ snap adapter interface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Apx-9

1-1

1 Introduction

This user guide covers two WTI product lines: DSM Series Serial Console Servers and CPM Series Remote Site Managers with Power Control. Both product lines are designed to simplify the process of remotely managing critical network assets at remote network equipment and offsite locations. The DSM series provides remote access to console port command capabilities on remote network components. CPM series devices provide remote access to console ports of remote network devices and also provide remote control of switchover and reboot functions at the remote location of network devices.

Security and housing features:

Secure Shell (SSHv2) encryption and address-specific IP security masks help prevent unauthorized access to command and configuration functions.

DSM/CPM offers four different levels of security for user accounts: Administrator, SuperUser, User, and ViewOnly. The administrator level provides full access to all serial port and plug switching functions, status indicators and configuration menus. The SuperUser level allows control of serial ports and sockets, but does not allow access to configuration functions. The user level allows access to only a select group of serial ports and sockets defined by the administrator. The ViewOnly level allows you to control device status, but not to control serial ports or power sockets or access configuration menus. DSM/CPM includes full Radius, LDAP and TACACS functions, DHCP, IP address filter and invalid access blocking function. An audit log records all user accesses, logon and logoff times, and command actions, and an alarm log records user-defined alarm events.

Environmental Monitoring and Management:

DSM/CPM can continuously monitor temperature levels, ping response and other factors. When DSM/CPM detects that user-defined thresholds for these values have been exceeded, the device can send an immediate notification via email, SNMP, or syslog. When temperature readings exceed user-defined critical levels, DSM/CPM can also intelligently reduce the amount of heat generated in the rack by temporarily shutting down non-essential equipment. When readings return to acceptable levels, the DSM/CPM can restore power to these devices to restore normal operating conditions. DSM/CPM also records temperature readings in a convenient log file.

In addition to the features described above, CPM-C Series devices have power monitoring capabilities that allow the device to monitor and report power, current, and voltage conditions at remote device locations. When current or power consumption exceeds user-defined limits, CPM-C can also generate alerts and shut down user-defined non-essential devices.

1-2

Introduction

STI management utility

DSM/CPM modules include the WTI Enterprise Management Utility (WMU) which allows you to manage multiple WTI modules from a single menu. For more information about the Enterprise Management Utility, see the WMU User Guide, which can be downloaded from the WTI website at http://www.wti.com/t-product-manuals.aspx.

Model numbers are covered

Various models of the DSM series and CPM series product lines are explained in this user manual. In this user manual, all these units are referred to as "DSM/CPM". Additionally, when discussing power control capabilities, all CPM-1600 and CPM-800 models are referred to as "CPM Series Units".

Typographic conventions

^ (eg ^X) Indicates a control character. For example, the text "^X" (Ctrl X) indicates that the [Ctrl] key and the [X] key should be pressed simultaneously.

COURIER FONT Displays characters typed on the keyboard. For example /RB or /ON 2.

[BoldFont] Text in bold and enclosed in brackets indicates a specific key. For example [Enter] or [Esc].

< > Indicates required keystrokes: For example: /P.

[ ] Indicates optional keys. For example: /P [n].

http://www.wti.com/t-product-manuals.aspx

2-1

2. Device description

2.1. DSM Series - Front panel

As shown in Figures 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3, the DSM series front panels include the following components:

1. PhoneLinePort (InternalDial-UpModemPort): If the internal modem option is present, the phone line port is used to connect to your external phone line.

Note: Telephone line jack is not present on DSM Series units equipped with the optional cellular modem.

2. RESET: Restarts the DSM operating system as described in Section 2.7.

3. DEFAULT: Starts DSM with the default parameters as described in Section 2.7.

4. ON: Lights up when AC power is applied.

RESET STATUS TO RDY DCD

ACTIVITY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 3533334

wti.com wti.com

PHONE

USB-Mini

KONSOLE SERVERMAN AUX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

RESET STATUS TO RDY DCD

ACTIVITY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

wti.com wti.com

PHONE

USB-Mini

KONSOLE SERVERMAN AUX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 2.1: DSM-40 Series - Front View

Figure 2.2: DSM-24 Series - Front View

STATUSDEFAULTRESET

HAND TO

AUF RDY DCDACTIVITY

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

wti.com wti.com

USB-Mini

Console server

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Figure 2.3: DSM-8 series devices - front side

2-2

Unit description

5. RDY: (Ready) Flashes to indicate the device is ready for use.

6. DCD: (Data Carrier Detect) Lights up when the DCD signal is present.

7. Mini USB port: The mini USB port can be connected to a PC or laptop to allow local access to DSM command mode functions. If you connect a device to the USB mini socket, please refer to section 5.5. For information on configuring the USB mini port, see Section 7.8.1.

Note: Serial port 1 on the DSM rear panel can also be used for local access to DSM command mode.

8. ACTIVITY LED: A set of LEDs that light up when a CTS signal is detected and blink when data is being transmitted to indicate activity on the corresponding port.

9. Cell phone jacks (optional): If the cellular modem option is present, the DSM front panel has two screw jacks for the cell phone antennas. See Section 4 for more information on choosing a cellular modem.

2-3

Unit description

2.2. DSM Series - Back panel

As shown in Figures 2.4, 2.5 and 2.6, the DSM backplane consists of the following components:

1. Power inputs: IEC 320 C14 inputs for connection to 00 to 240 VAC power supplies.

Notes: • Models with 48 DC power supplies contain a terminal block assembly (see Figure 5.1) in place of the power input. See Section 5.1.3 for more information.

• Some DSM series devices have an optional secondary IEC-320-C14 power input. This allows connection to a secondary power source in power redundancy applications.

2. RS232SerialPorts: For connecting to console ports on target devices. Standard RJ45 jacks configured as DTE ports. RS232 connections are similar to a serial port on a computer. Use a standard serial cable to connect a modem. If you are connecting a computer or other DTE device, see Section 5.7, Appendix B and Appendix C.

•DSM-8 series devices have 8 serial ports.

•The DSM-24 series devices have 24 serial ports.

•DSM-40 series devices have 40 serial ports.

Ethernet 10/100 TEL

COAST 0

SHORTEST WAY

EthernetEthernet 10/100

COAST 1

SHORTEST WAY

Ethernet100 – 120 V ~ 50/60 Hz 0,1–0,06 A

2 4 6 8

3 5 7

SETUP-PORT

(I AM)

1 2 3

Figure 2.4: DSM-8 series devices - back side

Ethernet 10/100 TEL

COAST 0

SHORTEST WAY

EthernetEthernet 10/100

COAST 1

SHORTEST WAY

Ethernet100 – 120 V ~ 50/60 Hz 0,1–0,06 A

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23

SETUP-PORT

(I AM)

1 2 3

Figure 2.5: DSM-24 series devices - back side

Ethernet 10/100 TEL

COAST 0

SHORTEST WAY

EthernetEthernet 10/100

COAST 1

SHORTEST WAY

Ethernet100 – 120 V ~ 50/60 Hz 0,1–0,06 A

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27 29 31 33 35 37 39

SETUP-PORT

(I AM)

1 2 3

Figure 2.6: DSM-40 series devices - back side

2-4

Unit description

3. Network port(s): RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to 10/100/1000 Base-T, TCP/IP network(s). Each network port also has two small LED indicators for connection and data activity. See Section 7.8 for more information on configuring the network port.

Notes: • Some DSM series devices have an optional secondary Ethernet port. This allows DSM to connect to both primary and secondary networks.

• DSM has an IP address in IPv4 format (192.168.168.168) by default. This allows you to connect to the device without having to assign an IP address first.

• If you connect only one network cable to a DSM series device that has the optional secondary network port, make sure you connect to the ETH0 port.

2-5

Unit description

2.3. CPM-1600 Series - Front panel

As shown in Figure 2.7, the front panel of the CPM-1600 series consists of the following components:

1. PhoneLinePort (InternalDial-UpModemPort): If the internal modem is present, the phone line port is used to connect to your external phone line.

Note: Phone line jack is not present on CPM Series units equipped with the optional cellular modem.

2. Network port(s): RJ45 Ethernet port for connection to 10/100/1000 Base-T, TCP/IP network(s). Each network port also has two small LED indicators for connection and data activity. See Section 7.8 for more information on configuring the network port.

Notes: • Some CPM-1600 series devices have an optional secondary Ethernet port. This allows the CPM-1600 to connect to both a primary and secondary network.

• The CPM-1600 has an IPv4 format IP address (192.168.168.168) by default.

• If you are connecting only one network cable to a CPM-1600 series device that has the Dual Ethernet Ports option, make sure the connection is made to the ETH0 port.

3. SerialPorts: Used to connect to console ports on target devices. Standard RJ45 sockets configured as DCE ports. See Section 5.7, Appendix B and Appendix C for more information on connecting devices to serial ports.

4. USBSetUpPort: The USB SetUp port can be connected to a PC or laptop to allow local access to CPM command operation functions. If you are connecting a device to the USB setup port, see Section 5.5. For information on configuring the USB Setup port, see Section 7.8.1.

Note: Serial port 1 on the CPM front panel can also be used for local access to CPM command mode.

5. RESET Button: Restarts the CPM-1600 as described in Section 2.7.

6. DEFAULTButton: Disables all plugins or sets plugins to default values as described in Section 2.7.

STATUSDEFAULTRESET

IN RDY DCD

PORT ACTIVITY

SERIAL PORTS

PERSONAL ACTIVITY

law

TELEFON Ethernet 0 Ethernet 1

LNK ACT LNK

3 5 7 9 11 13 15 A1

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7

A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

wti.com wti.com

SETUPUSB

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16

I STAND

MASTER SERVER TO CONSOLE + PDU

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Figure 2.7: CPM-1600 Series - Front View

2-6

Unit description

7. ON indicator: Lights up when AC is supplied to the unit.

8. RDYIndicator: (Ready) Flashes to indicate that the device is ready to receive commands.

9. DCDIndicator: The disk detection indicator.

10. PortActivityIndicators: A set of LEDs that light when a CTS signal is detected and blink when data is being transmitted to indicate activity on the port.

11. PlugActivityIndicators: A set of sixteen LED indicators that illuminate when power is applied to the respective outlet.

Note: Provided power is still present at the secondary power input for a particular leg, the connector activity indicators for that leg will flash and turn off if the primary power source for that leg is lost or disconnected.

12. Cellular Connectors (Optional): If the cellular modem option is present, the CPM-1600 front panel contains two screw connectors for the cellular antennas. See Section 4 for more information on choosing a cellular modem.

2-7

Unit description

2.4. CPM-1600 Series - Back Panel

As shown in Figures 2.8 and 2.9, the rear panel of the CPM-1600 series includes the following components:

1. BranchAPowerInlets: Two IEC-320-C20 inputs. Each outlet also includes a cable holder (not shown).

2. BranchBPowerInlets: Two IEC-320-C20 inputs. Each outlet also includes a cable holder (not shown).

Note: CPM-1600 series units are available in either quad/split bus or ATS configuration.

• On standard CPM-1600 models, each power input feeds a single bus with four outputs. If power is lost at a particular power input, the quad output bus associated with that power input will not receive power.

• CPM-1600-A models have an internal ATS switch. The top two power inputs provide power to the top eight power outputs and the two bottom power inputs provide power to the bottom eight power outputs. If the power supply connected to a particular power input fails, the CPM automatically starts drawing power from the other power input in the branch.

ONE

PRIMARY, SECONDARY

Secondary PRIMARY

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

Figure 2.8: CPM-1600-1 series - back side

ONE

PRIMARY, SECONDARY

Secondary PRIMARY

A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

Figure 2.9: CPM-1600-2 series - back side

2-8

Unit description

3. BranchASwitchedOutlets: Eight switched AC outlets.

•CPM-1600-1: Eight (8) each NEMA 5-15R receptacle.

•CPM-1600-2: Eight (8) each IEC320-C13 outputs.

4. BranchBSwitchedOutlets: Eight switched AC outlets.

•CPM-1600-1: Eight (8) each NEMA 5-15R receptacle.

•CPM-1600-2: Eight (8) each IEC320-C13 outputs.

2-9

Unit description

2.5. CPM-800 Series - Front Panel

As shown in Figure 2.10, the front panel of the CPM-800 series consists of the following components:

1. USBSetUpPort: The USB SetUp port can be connected to a PC or laptop to allow local access to CPM command operation functions. If you are connecting a device to the USB setup port, see Section 5.5. For information on configuring the USB Setup port, see Section 7.8.1.

Note: Serial port 1 on the CPM front panel can also be used for local access to CPM command mode.

2. PhoneLinePort (InternalModemPort): If the optional internal modem is present, the phone line port is used to connect to your external phone line.

Note: Phone line jack is not present on CPM Series units equipped with the optional cellular modem.

3. Network port(s): RJ45 Ethernet port to connect to your 10/100/1000Base-T, TCP/IP network. Each network port has two LED indicators for connection and data activity. See Section 7.8 for more information on port configuration.

Note: • Some CPM-800 series devices have an optional secondary Ethernet port. This allows the CPM-800 to connect to both a primary and secondary network.

• CPM has a default address in IPv4 format (192.168.168.168). This allows you to connect to the device without assigning an IP address first.

• If you are connecting only one network cable to a CPM-800 series device that has the optional secondary network connector, make sure the connection is connected to the ETH0 port.

4. SerialPorts: Eight serial ports for connecting to console ports on target devices. Standard RJ45 sockets configured as DCE ports. See Section 5.7, Appendix B and Appendix C for more information on connecting devices to serial ports.

5. ACTIVITY INDICATORS: A series of LEDs that illuminate when a CTS signal is detected and blink when data is being transmitted to indicate activity on the corresponding port.

RESET STATUS TO RDY DCD

ACTIVITY 1

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 82 3 4 5 6 7 8

wti.com wti.com

SETUPUSB

PLUG STATUS SET SERIAL PORTS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 PHONE Ethernet 0 Ethernet 1

ACT ACTLNK LNK

HAND TO

Consoleserver + PDU

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9 10 11

Figure 2.10: CPM-800 Series - Front View

2-10

Unit description

6. RESET button: Restarts the CPM-800 as described in Section 2.7.

7. DEFAULTButton: Disables all plugs or sets the plugs to default values as described in Section 2.7.

8. ON Indicator: An LED indicator that illuminates when AC is supplied to the device.

9. RDYIndicator: (Ready) Flashes to indicate that the device is ready to receive commands.

10. DCDIndicator: The disk detection indicator.

11. PlugStatusIndicators: A series of eight LED indicators that illuminate when power is applied to the respective outlet.

Note: If power is still present at the secondary power input, the output status indicators will flash and turn off if the primary power source is lost or disconnected.

12. Cellular Connectors (Optional): If the cellular modem option is present, the CPM-800 front panel has two screw connectors for the cellular antennas. See Section 4 for more information on choosing a cellular modem.

2-11

Unit description

2.6. CPM-800 Series - Back Panel

As shown in Figures 2.11 and 2.12, the rear panel of the CPM-800 series includes the following components:

1. PowerInlets: Two IEC-320-C20 inputs to connect to your main and secondary power supplies. Each outlet also includes a cable holder (not shown).

Note: CPM-800 series units are available in either dual/dual channel or ATS configuration.

• On CPM-800 dual/split bus models, each power input feeds a single bus with four outputs. If power is lost at a particular power input, the quad output bus associated with that power input will not receive power.

• On ATSCPM-800 models, the two power inputs provide power to all power outputs. If the power supply connected to one power input fails, the CPM automatically starts drawing power from the other power input in the branch.

2. SwitchedOutlets: Eight AC outlets that can be turned on, off, or reset in response to user commands:

•CPM-800-1Series: Eight (8) each NEMA 5-15R receptacle.

•CPM-800-2Series: Eight (8) each IEC320-C13 outlet.

PRIMÄR SEKUNDÄR A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

1 2

Figure 2.11: CPM-800-1 - Back side

Figure 2.12: CPM-800-2 - Back side

PRIMÄR SEKUNDÄR A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8

1 2

2-12

Unit description

2.7. Front panel button functions

The front panel buttons can perform various functions as described below:

Notes: • Front panel button functions can also be disabled via the System Parameters menu as described in Section 7.2.

• If DSM/CPMI is factory reset, all custom configuration parameters will be deleted and the default 'Super' user account will also be restored.

• When DSM/CPMI is re-initialized, all ports will be disconnected.

• All port activity LEDs blink once during the boot process.

1. RebootOperatingSystem-KeepUser-DefinedParameters:

a) Press and hold the CLEAR (or RESET) button for five seconds, then release.

b) The DSM/CPM operating system will be restarted. All custom parameters are preserved.

2. RebootOperatingSystem-ResetAllParameterstoFactoryDefaults:

a) Press and hold the SET (or DEFAULT) and CLEAR (or RESET) buttons simultaneously for five seconds, then release.

b) The DSM/CPM operating system will be restarted. All customized parameters will be reset to factory defaults.

Note: The RDY indicator will continue to flash for approximately 45 seconds while the parameters are cleared and the keys are re-created. The RDY indicator then stops flashing on reboot.

3-1

3. Getting started

This section describes a simplified setup process for DSM/CPM hardware that allows you to communicate with the device to demonstrate basic functionality and verify proper operation.

Notes: • This section describes the communication process with the DSM/CPM module and explains the basic port connections and power control functions. A detailed description of the configuration options and advanced functional features can be found in the remainder of this user manual.

• If your DSM/CPM series device has the Cellular Modem option, it is recommended that you first complete this quick start procedure and then proceed to Section 4, which describes the procedure for setting up cellular communication with your DSM/CPM device .

3.1. Enable DSM/CPM

Follow the safety precautions at the beginning of this manual, then connect the device to a suitable power source. Plug the cable(s) into the power input(s) on the device(s), snap the cable retainer(s) into place (if present), then connect the cable to a suitable power supply.

Information about the power requirement and maximum load can be found on the device's rating plate. Note that some DSM/CPM series devices have two power inputs and CPM-1600 series devices have four power inputs. When power is applied to the DSM/CPM, the ON LED on the front of the instrument should light up and the RDY LED will start flashing within 90 seconds. This indicates that the device is ready to receive commands.

3-2

Started

3.2. Connect your computer to DSM/CPM

During this quick-start process, the DSM/CPM can be controlled either from a local computer via the serial or mini-USB port, or remotely via a modem or TCP/IP network. To select parameters, connect ports, or control outputs, commands are issued to the DSM/CPM via either the network port, modem port, mini USB port, or serial installation port.

• NetworkPort: Connect the network interface cable to the DSM/CPM Ethernet port.

Note: If you connect your network cable to a DSM/CPM module that has two Ethernet ports, make sure you connect to the ETH0 port.

• SerialPort: Use the supplied Ethernet cable and RJ45 to DB-9 adapter to connect your computer's COM port to Serial Port 1 (the system setup port). See Appendix B for a description of the serial port interface.

• USB MiniPort: Use a standard USB Mini Port cable to connect to the USB Mini Setup port of a DSM or CPM series device.

• Modem: If the DSM/CPM has an internal modem, connect your external phone line to the DSM/CPM phone line (modem) port.

Notes:• If the DSM/CPM module includes the cellular modem option, then this is the case

In normal operation, the device can also be controlled via a cellular connection as described in Section 4. However, for this quick start procedure, it is recommended to communicate with the DSM/CPM device using one of the methods described above.

• DSM/CPM series devices that include the cellular modem option do not include a dial-up modem.

• Note that an external modem can also be connected to the DSM/CPM serial ports as described in Section 5.7, Appendix and Appendix C.

• See Appendix and Appendix C for cable recommendations and other information about connecting devices to the DSM/CPM unit.

3-3

Started

3.3. Contact DSM/CPM

When properly installed and configured, DSM/CPM allows command mode access via a web browser, SSH/Telnet client, modem, or local computer. However, to ensure security, both web browser and telnet access are disabled by default. See Section 7.8.1 to enable web browser and/or telnet access.

Notes: • The default parameters for the DSM/CPM serial port are set as follows: 9600 bps, RTS/CTS handshake, 8 data bits, OneStopBit, no parity. Although these parameters can easily be redefined, for this quick start procedure it is recommended that you configure the communicator to accept the default parameters.

• DSM/CPM has a default IP address (192.168.168.168) and a default subnet mask (255.255.255.0). This allows network access to command mode, provided you are communicating with the DSM/CPM from a node on the same subnet. If you are trying to access DSM/CPM from a node that is not on the same subnet, see Section 7.8.1 for additional configuration notes.

• If you are connecting only one network cable to a DSM/CPM device that has two Ethernet ports, make sure you connect to the ETH0 port.

1. AccessCommandMode: DSM/CPM includes two separate user interfaces. the text interface and the web browser interface. The text interface is available via local computer, SSH client, Telnet or modem and can be used to both configure DSM/CPM and establish connections between ports. The web browser interface is only available over the TCP/IP network and can be used to configure the device, but cannot establish connections between ports.

a) ViaLocalPC: Start the communication program and then press Enter. Note that when viewed on a computer running Windows XP or later, MiniPort USB is listed as USB to Serial in the Serial COM Port menu.

b) ViaSSHClient: Start the SSH client, enter the default IP address (192.168.168.168) for DSM/CPM and call the connect command.

c) ViaWebBrowser: Make sure browser access is enabled as described in section 7.8.1. Open your JavaScript-enabled web browser, type the standard DSM/CPM IP address in IPv4 format (192.169.168.168) into the web browser's address bar, and then press [Enter].

d) ViaTelnet: Ensure that Telnet access is enabled as described in Section 7.8.1. Start the telnet client and enter the default IP address in IPv4 format of DSM/CPM (192.168.168.168).

e) ViaModem: Use the communicator to call the line number connected to the telephone line port of the DSM/CPM.

Note: If the cellular modem option is present, the DSM/CPM can also be controlled via cellular telephony as described in Section 4. However, it is recommended that you complete this quick start procedure before installing and enabling the cellular modem option.

3-4

Started

2. Username/Password Prompt: A message will appear asking you to enter your username (login) and password. The default username is "super" (all lowercase, no quotes) and the default password is also "super". When you enter a valid username and password, DSM/CPM displays either the Main Menu (web browser interface) or the Port Status screen (text interface).

Notes: • The default username is fine.

• The default password is great

• If a login banner is set as described in Section 7.2, the banner page will be displayed before the command interface is displayed. The link banner may be used to display legal notices or other information.

3.4. Connection ports and switching outputs

Although you can select configuration parameters using both the text interface and the web browser interface, the text interface is used whenever commands are invoked to bind ports. If you previously accessed command mode via the web browser interface, exit command mode (logout) and then re-enter command mode via the text interface as described in Section 3.3.

To connect ports and switch outputs, follow this procedure:

1. Check the Help menu: At the command line of the text interface, type /H and press Enter to display the Help menu, which contains a basic list of all available DSM/CPM commands.

2. Establish Port Connections: DSM/CPM can perform two different types of port connections. Resident Links and Third Party Links:

a) ResidentConnection: Your resident port issues a /C command to connect to a second port.

I. To bind the permanent port to port 3, type /C 3 [Enter]. When connected to port 3, the device does not recognize additional commands issued through its permanent port. However, the device recognizes a resident disconnect sequence being issued on one of the connected ports.

ii. Grant the resident disconnect sequence. Type ^X (press [Ctrl] and [X] at the same time).

3-5

Started

b) ThirdPartyConnection: Your home port issues a /C command to establish a connection between two other ports.

I. To connect port 3 to port 4, type /C 3 4 [Enter].

ii. While ports 3 and 4 are connected, your home port will continue to acknowledge commands. Type /S [Enter] to display the status screen. In the STATUS column, ports 3 and 4 should now be listed as connected and the other ports as "free".

iii. Issue a command to disconnect from the third party. Type /D 3 [Enter]. The device displays the message "Are you sure (y/n?"). prompt. Type y and press Enter to log out.

IV. Type /S [Enter] to display the status screen. In the "STATUS" column, ports 3 and 4 should now be listed as "Free".

Note: Although the web browser interface cannot be used to connect DSM/CPM serial ports, it can be used to disconnect DSM/CPM serial ports as described in Section 6.2.1.3.

3. ControllingOutlets(CPMSeriesModelsOnly): You may want to run the following tests to make sure the switched outlets are working properly.

Notes: • Switch sockets can also be controlled via the web browser interface as described in section 6.3.

• Switching outputs are not available on standard DSM series devices.

a) RebootOutlet: At the command line, type /BOOT 1 and press Enter. The slot 1 status light should turn off, stop briefly, and then turn on again to indicate that the boot cycle has completed successfully.

b) SwitchOutletOff: At the prompt, type /OFF 1, then press Enter. The status light for slot 1 should turn off to indicate that the command completed successfully. Leave link 1 in the "disabled" state, then proceed to the next step.

c) SwitchOutletOn: At the prompt, type /ON 1 and press Enter. The status light for slot 1 should then turn back on, indicating that the command completed successfully.

4. ExitCommandMode: To exit command mode, type /X and press Enter.

3-6

Started

3.5. The WMU Enterprise Management solution

The WMU Enterprise Management solution provides a central interface that can be used to configure, manage, and control multiple out-of-band WTI management devices distributed across a large enterprise network infrastructure. Installing WMU in your network operations center or support eliminates the need for individual access to WTI units to perform firmware updates, control power switching functions, edit user accounts, and perform other management and control functions.

You can download the WMU software and user manual from:

ftp://wtiftp.wti.com/pub/TechSupport/WMU/WtiManagementUtilityInstall.exe

3.6. The cellular modem option

If your DSM/CPM series device has the cellular modem option, proceed to Section 4 for instructions on setting up cellular communication.

This completes the quick start process for DSM/CPM. Before operating the device, it is recommended that you read the rest of this manual for important information about advanced configuration options and more detailed operating instructions. If you have additional questions about the DSM/CPM module, please contact WTI Customer Service as described in Appendix D.

ftp://wtiftp.wti.com/pub/TechSupport/WMU/WtiManagementUtilityInstall.exe

4-1

4. Select mobile modem

This section provides a basic overview of the installation and setup process for the WTI cellular modem option on DSM/CPM series products.

Notes: • Before configuring the cellular modem option, it is recommended that you do so

the quick start procedure described in Section 3.

• When accessing DSM/CPM command mode, refer to Section 3.3 or Section 6.1 for further instructions.

• It is recommended to use the text interface (command line interface) when setting up the cellular modem option.

4.1. Installation

To communicate with the DSM/CPM device using the cellular modem option, you must first purchase a cellular plan. When choosing a cellular phone plan, WTI recommends that the plan include:

• AStaticIPAddress• AVPN (VirtualPrivateNetwork)

4.1.1. Connect the cellular antennas. Connect the two cellular antennas (supplied with the device) to the two threaded connectors on the DSM/CPM front panel.

4.1.2. Installing the SIM card After you have purchased a mobile phone plan, the next step is to install the SIM card (supplied with your mobile phone plan) into your DSM/CPM device. To install the SIM card, proceed as follows:

Note: Before installing the SIM card, make sure that the WTIDSM or CPM series device is turned off.

1. Remove the SIM card cover on the left side of the WTI device, which is located next to the cellular antenna. Note that the plate is held in place by a small Phillips head screw.

2. Carefully slide the SIM card into the SIM card slot with the notch/notched corner of the card facing the front panel of the device (see cover image). Make sure the SIM card is firmly in place, but do not apply too much pressure as this may damage the card.

3. Replace the cover covering the SIM card slot, replace the retaining screw and apply power to the DSM/CPM again.

4-2

Select mobile modem

4.1.3. Configuring the SIM card After installing the SIM card, use the /cell command to configure the SIM card as described below:

1. Access the command mode of the DSM/CPM series device's text interface as described in Section 6.1.

2. When the command prompt appears, type /cell and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Statistics menu.

3. In the Statistics Cell Modem Statistics menu, type 1 and press Enter to display the Configuration Name (APN) Access Point Name (APN) menu.

4. Enter the APN (provided with your mobile plan) and press Enter. The cellular modem option is automatically configured based on the information on the SIM card.

5. The configuration process takes a few minutes. When the configuration is complete, the Cell Modem Statistics menu reappears, indicating that the configuration was successful.

4.2 Defining the static route

After the SIM card is installed and configured, the next step is to set the static route.

Note: The static route is only required if the cellular modem port is not set as the default gateway.

4.2.1. Specify a static route when the default gateway address is known. If you already know the default gateway address for your mobile network, do the following. If you do not know the default gateway address, proceed to Section 4.2.2.

1. Type /p modem and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

2. When the Cell Modem Parameters menu appears, select Static Route to display the Static Route submenu. When the Static Route submenu appears, enter a number for the first free static route definition line and press Enter.

3. Specify the static route in the following format:

Διαδρομή hinzufügen GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG gw CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC

Where: GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG is the default gateway address. CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC is the IP address for the mobile modem.

4. Press [Esc] once to exit the Static Route menu, then press [Esc] again to exit the Cell Modem Parameters menu and save the new static route. Note that it may take several minutes for the mobile modem to save the newly configured parameters.

5. Perform the verification process described in Section 4.4 to ensure that cellular access is properly enabled.

4-3

Select mobile modem

4.2.2. Specify a static route when the default gateway address is unknown. If you don't know the default gateway address used by your mobile network, you need to use DSM/CPM's /bash command to view the default gateway address as below:

1. If you are communicating over a local network and do not need the default gateway address, connect to the DSM/CPM via serial, USB or network (if your network is on the same network and the Default Gateway is not required). )

2. Temporarily disable the default gateway for the network port: When the command prompt appears, type /N and press Enter to display the Network Parameters menu.

a) From the Network Parameters menu, select Gateway Address. The Gateway Address submenu appears. Note the currently specified gateway address.

Note: Be sure to note or save the currently set gateway address. You will need this address later when you re-enable the default gateway on the network port after the static route definition is complete.

b) In the Gateway Address sub-menu, press [Space] and then [Enter]. This clears the currently specified gateway address and disables the default gateway on the network port.

c) Press [Esc] twice to exit the Network Parameters menu and save the modified parameters.

3. Enable the default gateway for the cellular modem port: At the command line of the text interface, type /p modem, and then press Enter to display the Cellular Modem Parameters menu.

a) When the Cell Modem Parameters menu appears, type 1 and press Enter to access the Default Gateway menu. Use the menu to enable the default gateway for the cellular modem port.

b) Press [Esc] twice to exit the Default Gateway menu and save the newly set parameters.

Note: It may take several minutes for the mobile modem to save the newly set default gateway state.

4. View the IP address for the cellular modem port:

a) At the DSM/CPM command line, type /cell and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Statistics menu.

b) When the Cell Statistics menu appears, record the IP address for the cell modem port (listed under the Cell Connection Information heading).

c) Press [Esc] to exit the Cell Modem Statistics menu.

5. Establish an SSH connection to the DSM/CPM over the cellular network.

4-4

Select mobile modem

6. View the gateway address: At the DSM/CPM command line, type /bash netstat -nat and press Enter to display the Active Internet Connections screen. Note that it may take a few minutes for the device to respond.

a) The IP address of the cellular modem port is displayed in the "External Address" column.

b) The "Status" column for the IP address of the mobile modem port is "Installed".

c) Note the gateway address (local address) corresponding to the IP address of the mobile modem port (external address).

d) To exit the Active Internet Connections menu, press Enter.

7. Specify the static route: At the DSM/CPM command line, type /p modem and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

a) When the Cell Modem Parameters menu appears, select Static Route to access the Static Route submenu. When the Static Route submenu appears, enter a number for the first free static route definition line and press Enter.

b) In the Static Route menu, see Mobile Modem Port Address (External Address) and Gateway Address (Local Address) above. Enter a route command in the following format:

Διαδρομή hinzufügen GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG gw CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC

Wow:

GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG is the gateway address (local address). CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC is the cellular modem address (external address).

c) Press [Enter] to select the new static route, then press [Esc] twice to save the static route definition and exit the Static Route menu. Note that it takes several minutes to save the newly defined parameters.

d) For more information, see the example below.

StaticRouteDefinitionBeispiel:

Assume that the address for the mobile modem port address (foreign address) is CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC and the netstat function returns the Active Internet Connections screen shown in Figure 4.1 below. In this example, the gateway address (local address) would be GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG. Therefore, the static route will be defined as:

Διαδρομή hinzufügen GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG gw CCC.CCC.CCC.CCC

Active Internet Connections (Server and Installed) Proto Recv-Q Send-Q Local Address External Addresstcp 0 0 0.0.0:22 0.0.0.0:* LISTENtcp 0 0 GGG.GGG.GGG.GGG:22 CCC.CCC.CCC. CCC:2892 ESTABLISHEDtcp 0 0 :::22 :::* LISTEN

Figure 4.1: Example of static route definition

4-5

Select mobile modem

8. Disable the default gateway for the cellular modem port:

a) At the DSM/CPM command line, type /p modem and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

b) When the Cellular Modem Parameters menu appears, go to the Default Gateway submenu and disable Default Gateway for the cellular modem port.

c) Press [Esc] twice to exit the cellular modem parameters and save the newly set default gateway state.

Note: It may take several minutes for the mobile modem to save the newly configured parameters.

9. Re-enable the default gateway for the network port: When the command prompt appears, type /N and press Enter to display the Network Parameters menu.

a) From the Network Parameters menu, select Gateway Address. The Gateway Address submenu appears.

b) In the Gateway Address submenu, type the previous gateway address that you saved in step 2 at the beginning of this section, and then press Enter.

c) Press [Esc] twice to exit the Network Parameters menu and save the modified parameters.

Note: It may take several minutes for the mobile modem to save the newly configured parameters.

4.3. Enable web services

If you need to allow access to the DSM/CPM web browser interface via cellular, you must enable web services through the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

1. At the DSM/CPM command line, type /p modem and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

2. When the Cell Modem Settings menu appears, use the Web Services option to enable access to the cellular network.

3. Press [Esc] twice to exit the Cell Modem Parameters menu and save the newly set Web Services state.

Note: It may take several minutes for the cellular modem to save the state of the newly defined web services.

4-6

Select mobile modem

4.4. Make sure mobile access is available

After setting up mobile access, it is recommended that you run this process to verify that the process was completed successfully.

1. If you are still logged into DSM/CPM command mode, type /X and press [Enter] to log out of the device.

2. VerifyCellularAccesstoTextInterface (CLI):

a) Create an SSH connection to the DSM/CPM from the cell. When prompted to login, enter your username and password. When the command prompt appears, type /cell and press Enter.

b) If the Cell Modem Statistics screen appears, it means that the cellular network access has been successfully activated.

c) If the Cell Statistics screen does not appear after a few minutes, there is probably an error in specifying a static route. In this case, use the procedure described in section 4.2 to view the static route definition. Carefully review the static route definition to ensure that the IP addresses have been entered correctly and that there are no syntax errors.

3. Check mobile access in the web browser interface:

a) Start your browser and enter the IP address of the mobile modem port for DSM/CPM in the browser's address bar. When prompted to login, enter your username and password.

b) If the DSM/CPM home page is displayed, it means that mobile access to DSM/CPM has been activated successfully.

c) If the DSM/CPM home page is not displayed, this probably means that either web access has not been enabled as described in Section 4.3 or there is an error in the static route definition.

I. Web access is not enabled: Ensure that web access is enabled as described in Section 4.3.

ii. Static Route Error: Use the procedure described in section 4.2 to view the static route definition. Carefully review the static route definition to ensure that the IP address has been entered correctly and that there are no syntax errors.

4-7

Select mobile modem

4.5. Configure firewall/IP tables (optional)

If you want to restrict access to the DSM/CPM via mobile, you must set a firewall. The IP Tables menu is used to define a firewall that defines which IP addresses are allowed to access the DSM/CPM via mobile and which IP addresses are denied. To set up the firewall, proceed as follows:

1. At the command line of the text interface, type /p modem and press Enter to display the Cell Modem Parameters menu.

2. When the Cell Modem Parameters menu appears, select the IP Tables option.

3. When the IP Tables menu appears, use Linux syntax to specify which IP addresses to allow access and which IP addresses to deny. In most cases, IP tables should allow access to administrators and deny access to everyone else.

This completes the installation process for the WTI Cellular Modem option. See the rest of this user guide for more information.

5-1

5. Hardware-Installation

5.1. Connecting the power cables

5.1.1. Connect the DSM/CPM to your power supply. Follow the precautions listed below and at the beginning of this user guide, then connect the DSM/CPM to a suitable power supply.

CAUTION:• Before attempting to install this equipment, read the warnings and

Observe the precautions listed at the beginning of the user manual.

• This device may only be operated from the power source specified on the device nameplate. If you are not sure what type of power supply is available, contact your local power company.

• Reliable grounding (grounding) of this equipment must be maintained. When connecting to a power strip rather than directly to the branch circuit, special care must be taken with the power connections.

• Some DSM/CPM models have an optional secondary power input to allow connection to a secondary power supply.

• CPM-1600 series units have four power inputs that are split into either two branches or four branches.

5.1.2. Installing the Power Cord Retainer (CPM Models Only) CPM Series units have a cord retainer designed to prevent the AC power cord from being accidentally disconnected from the unit.

When connecting power cords to the device, first fold the cord holder aside, and then firmly plug the power cord into the outlet. Once you have connected the cable, slide the cable clip over the slot to secure the cable to the device.

5-2

Hardware-Installation

5.1.3. DC Powered Devices When connecting a DSM series DC powered device to the DC power source, note that the DC terminal block is designed to connect to two separate power sources. First, remove the protective cover from the terminal block, connect the wires from the -48 VDC power sources to the screw terminals, connect the ground wire to the marked ground screw, tighten the screw terminals, make sure that the wires are securely fastened, and then , put the protective cover back.

5.2. Connecting the network cable

The network connector is an RJ45 Ethernet connector for connection to a TCP/IP network. Connect the 10/100/1000Base-T cable to the network port. Some DSM/CPM series devices have an optional secondary network connection in addition to the primary network connection.

Note that DSM/CPM includes a standard IPv4 IP address (192.168.168.168) and a standard IPv4 subnet mask (255.255.255.0). When installing DSM/CPM in a working network environment, it is recommended to configure network parameters as described in Section 7.8.

Note: If you connect only one network cable to a DSM/CPM module that contains two Ethernet ports, make sure you connect to the ETH0 port.

-48V

-48V -48V00

0.1A

BUS A BUS B

ground screw

Figure 5.1: TerminalBlockAssembly(DSMSeries,DCUnitsOnly)

5-3

Hardware-Installation

5.3. The internal modem port

If the DSM/CPM device has the optional internal modem, connect an RJ11 phone line to the phone line port. See Section 6.2.4, Section 6.2.5 and Section 7.7 for modem configuration information. Note that an external modem can also be connected to the DSM/CPM serial ports as described in Section 5.7, Appendix B and Appendix C.

Note: DSM/CPM series devices that include the cellular modem option do not include an internal dial-up modem.

5.4. The cellular modem option

If your DSM/CPM device has the cellular modem option, see Section 4 of this User Guide for setup instructions.

5.5. Connecting to installation ports

To select configuration parameters and check device status, commands are issued to the DSM/CPM via either the network port, installation port, or mini USB port. Note that it is not necessary to connect to all three ports. Connect your computer's COM port to the installation port or mini USB port. See Appendix B for a pinout description of the Setup port.

• RJ45SetUpPort: When connecting to the RJ45 setup port, use the supplied DX9F-DTE-RJ adapter and RJ45 Ethernet cable to connect your computer's COM port to the SRM's setup port (serial port 1) to connect.

• USBMiniSetUpPort: Use a standard mini USB port cable to connect to the mini USB port.

5.6. Connection to switching sockets (CPM devices only)

Connect the Switch device's power cord to one of the AC outlets on the back of the CPM Series device. Note that when power is applied to the CPM series device, the AC outlets are set to "ON" by default.

Note: Power control functions are not available on standard DSM series units. Switched sockets are only available on CPM series devices.

5-4

Hardware-Installation

5.7. Connecting devices to the DSM/CPM serial ports

DSM/CPM units have RJ45 RS232 sockets wired in DCE configuration. In the default state, the serial ports are configured for 9600 bps, no parity, 8 data bits, 1 interrupt bit. See Appendix B for a description of the serial interface.

When properly configured, serial ports can be connected to almost any device that has an RS232 console port. In addition, the serial ports can also be used to allow local users to configure and control the DSM/CPM module. Serial Port 1 is labeled as a "Setup Port" and therefore cannot be reconfigured as a Buffer Mode or Passive Mode port to ensure the port is available for local communication with the DSM/CPM.

Notes: • See Appendix and Appendix C for cable recommendations and other information about connecting devices to the DSM/CPM.

• To connect external modems, router switches, or other DTE and DCE devices to the DSM/CPM serial ports, see Appendix C for cable and adapter information.

After connecting new devices to the DSM/CPM serial ports, access the DSM/CPM command mode and select communication parameters for each serial port as described in Section 7.7.

5.8. emergency shutdown function

The CPM series devices also have an emergency shut-off function, with which all sockets can be turned off immediately in the event of an emergency. For more information on the EPO feature, contact WTI Technical Support at[emailprotected].

This completes the DSM/CPM installation instructions. Proceed to the next section for instructions on basic device configuration.

6-1

6. Basic operation

6.1. Contact DSM/CPM Unit

To configure and control DSM/CPM, you must first log in to the device and access command mode. DSM/CPM offers two separate configuration and control interfaces. the web browser interface and the text interface. DSM/CPM also offers four different methods of accessing Command Mode. over a network, over a local console, over a dial-up modem (assuming a modem is present), or over cellular (assuming the cellular modem option is present). The web browser interface is only available via network, local console or mobile. The text interface is available over a network (SSH or Telnet), dial-up modem, cellular modem, or local computer.

Note: DSM/CPM can also be controlled and managed through the supplied WMU business management software. For more information about the WMU Enterprise Management software, see Section 6.1.3.

6.1.1. The Text Interface The text interface (also known as a "command line interface" or "CLI") is a series of text menus that allow you to set options and parameters by typing the number for the option you want on your keyboard and then typing in a value for the option.

Since both the web browser interface and Telnet accessibility are disabled in the default state, you must use the text interface to communicate with the device via a local computer or SSH connection when setting up the device for the first time. After accessing the command mode through the text interface, you can enable web access and telnet access, if required, to allow future communication with the device via web browser or telnet. You cannot communicate with the device via a web browser or telnet until you enable these options.

Once access is enabled, you can use the text interface to communicate with DSM/CPM via a local computer, Telnet or SSH connection. You can also enter command mode through the text interface using a dial-up modem if you have a dial-up modem.

• Network access: DSM/CPM must be connected to the TCP/IP network and your computer must have a communication program (eg TeraTerm or PuTTy).

• Dial-up modem access: A telephone line must be connected to the internal modem (if present). In addition, your computer must have a communication program.

• Cellular Modem Access: Cellular communication with the DSM/CPM is only available when the cellular modem option is present.

• Local computer access: Your computer must be connected to the DSM/CPM Setup serial port, the installation port must be set to any mode (default port mode for the installation port), and your computer must have a communicator. Serial port 1 is marked as the installation port and is configured by default to communicate with a local controller. DSM and CPM devices also have a mini USB configuration port. See Section 7.8.1 for instructions on how to configure the Mini SetUp USB port.

6-2

basic function

To access command mode through the text interface, do the following:

Notes:• When communicating with the device for the first time, you will not be able to telnet to the device until you access command mode from the local client computer or SSH and use the Network Parameters menu to enable telnet as described in Sec. 7.8.

• Some DSM and CPM series devices have an optional secondary Ethernet port in addition to the primary Ethernet port to allow connection to both a primary and secondary network.

• If you connect only one network cable to a DSM/CPM module that has two Ethernet ports, make sure you connect the cable to the ETH0 port.

1. Contact the DSM/CPM Unit:

a) ViaLocalPC: Start the communication program and press [Enter]. Wait for the connection message, then go to step 2. Note that when viewed on a computer running Windows XP or later, MiniPort USB is listed as USB to Serial in the Serial COM Port menu.

b) Via network: DSM/CPM includes an IP address in standard IPv4 format (192.168.168.168) and a subnet mask in standard IPv4 format (255.255.255.0). This allows you to communicate with the device from any network node on the same subnet without having to assign an IP address to the device first. See Section 7.8 for more information.

I. ViaSSHClient: Start the SSH client and enter the IP address of the DSM/CPM. Enter the login command, wait for the login message, then go to step 2.

ii. ViaTelnet: Start the telnet client and then telnet to the IP address of the DSM/CPM. Wait for the login message and then go to step 2.

c) ViaDial-UpModem: If your DSM/CPM device has the optional external modem or you have installed a modem in one of the DSM/CPM serial ports, you can use the communication program to call the number of the telephone line you have connected on the modem.

d) ViaCellular: If your DSM/CPM device has the cellular modem option and the cellular modem is configured as described in Section 4, you can use your communications program to connect to the cellular modem's IP address.

2. Login/Password Prompt: A message will appear asking you for a username (login name) and password. The default username is great (all lowercase) and the default password is great too.

Note: If a login banner is set as described in Section 7.2, a banner page will be displayed before the message is displayed. The link banner may be used to display legal notices or other information.

6-3

basic function

6.1.2. The Web Browser Interface The Web Browser Interface is a series of Web forms that allow you to click buttons to select configuration parameters, disconnect serial ports, and perform power-off and reboot functions (power control functions are available only on CPM devices). and/or enter text in the fields provided.

Note: To use the web browser interface, web access must first be enabled via the text interface network parameters menu (/N), DSM/CPM must be connected to a TCP/IP network, and your computer must be JavaScript enabled be equipped with a web browser;

1. Open your JavaScript enabled web browser, type the default IPv4 IP address of DSM/CPM (192.168.168.168) into the address bar of the web browser and press [Enter].

2. Username/Password Prompt: A message box will ask you to enter your username and password. The default username is great (all lowercase) and the default password is great too.

Note: If a login banner is set as described in Section 7.2, a banner page will be displayed before the message is displayed. The link banner may be used to display legal notices or other information.

6.1.3. The WMU Enterprise Management Solution The WMU Enterprise Management solution provides a central interface that can be used to configure, manage, and control multiple out-of-band WTI management devices distributed across a large enterprise network infrastructure. Installing WMU in your network operations center or support eliminates the need for individual access to WTI units to perform firmware updates, control power switching functions, edit user accounts, and perform other management and control functions.

You can download the WMU software and user manual from:

ftp://wtiftp.wti.com/pub/TechSupport/WMU/WtiManagementUtilityInstall.exe

6-4

basic function

6.2. Connecting and disconnecting serial ports - text interface

The text interface allows connections to be made between DSM/CPM serial ports. This allows you to access the console port of a connected device or allow connected devices to access the DSM/CPM's internal modem or network port.

Note: The web browser interface cannot be used to connect ports, but it can be used to disconnect ports. To connect ports, you need to access command mode through the text interface.

As explained in Section 7.7.1, DSM/CPM serial ports have four modes of operation: any-to-any mode, passive mode, buffer mode, modem mode, and PPP modem mode.

6.2.1. Any-to-Any Mode Any-to-any mode ports can be connected to other any-to-any, passive, cache, or modem ports by accessing the command mode through the text interface and using the /C command is issued. All ports can be configured for any function. This is also the default mode for port 1.

6.2.1.1. Port Connection - Text Interface Two different types of connections can be made between DSM/CPM serial ports. Resident and third-party connections DSM/CPM allows communication between devices without requiring both ports to use the same communication parameters.

• ResidentConnections: Your resident port issues a /C command to connect to a second port. For example, port 4 issues the /C command to connect to port 5.

• ThirdPartyConnections: (Administrator and SuperUser modes only) The resident port issues a /C command to establish a connection between two other ports. For example, port 1 is your home port, and port 1 issues a command to connect port 2 to port 3.

Notes: • Third-party connections can only be initiated by accounts and ports that do so

Administrator or superuser level commands are allowed.

• These serial ports cannot use the /C command to initiate a connection to the network port.

• User-level accounts may only connect to ports explicitly allowed by the account. Connections to all serial ports are allowed at the administrator and superuser level.

• Text interface commands are not case sensitive. Port names are also not case sensitive when used on command lines to connect/disconnect ports.

6-5

basic function

To connect ports through the text interface, do the following:

1. Access the command mode through the text interface.

2. Invoke the /C command to bind the desired ports.

a) ResidentConnect: To connect your resident port to another port, type /C xx [Enter]. Where xx is the number or name of the port you want to connect to. DSM/CPM will display the connected port numbers along with the command needed to disconnect the two ports.

Example: To bind your home port to port 8, type /C 8 [Enter].

b) ThirdPartyConnect: (admin and SuperUser mode only) To connect any two ports (except your home port), type /C xx XX [Enter]. where xx and XX are two port names or numbers. DSM/CPM displays the numbers of the two connected ports.

Example: To connect port 5 to port 6, access command mode on a third port that allows admin-level commands (with an account that also allows admin-level or SuperUser-level commands) and call the following command on: /C 5 6 [Enter].

Notes: • Resident connections: DSM/CPM serial ports must not initiate a persistent connection to the network port.

• Third Party Connections: Serial ports must not connect any other port to the network port. For example, port 1 should not connect port 3 to the network port.

Notes:• When the idle timeout is disabled, sports can automatically reconnect after a power failure. When power is restored to the device, previously connected port pairs are automatically reconnected, provided the idle timeout is disabled on both ports and both ports have been connected for at least ten minutes prior to the power failure.

• The only exception to this rule is serial port 1, which remains disconnected after power is restored to provide a free serial port to access local command mode.

When the /C command specifies the port name, just enter enough letters to distinguish the desired port from other ports. Enter an asterisk (*) to represent the remaining characters in the port name. For example, to bind your permanent port to a port named "SALES", the bind command can be invoked as /C S* provided there are no other port names beginning with the letter "S".

6-6

basic function

6.2.1.2. Disconnecting Ports - Text Interface The text interface provides three different methods for disconnecting ports: permanent installation disconnect, third-party disconnect, and inactivity timeout. If the timeout feature is enabled, persistent or third-party ports are disconnected when timed out with no activity.

Note: The DTR Output option in the Port Parameters menu determines how DTR responds when the port is disconnected. DTR can be low, held high, or pulsed and then held high.

1. ResidentDisconnect: Disconnects your resident port from another port. For example, if you are communicating on port 3 and port 3 is connected to port 4, a hardwired disconnect is used to separate the two ports. DSM/CPM offers two different forms of disconnect commands. the one-character form and the three-character form (see Section 7.7.2. for more information):

Note: The resident disconnect methods listed here cannot be used to terminate a direct Telnet connection. See Section 11.3.4 for more information.

a) OneCharacter (default): Enter the logout character once (default = [Ctrl] plus [X]). You do not need to type a carriage return before or after the disconnect character.

b) Three characters: Uses the format "[Enter]LLL[Enter]", where L is the disconnect character. For example, if the disconnect character is "+", the break sequence is [Enter]+++[Enter].

c) If the default disconnect command is not compatible with your application, both the command format and the disconnect character can be redefined through the port configuration menus as described in section 7.7.2.

2. ThirdPartyDisconnect: (admin and superuser mode only) The /D command is issued from your home port to disconnect two other ports. For example, if your permanent port is port 1, a third-party splitter is used to separate ports 3 and 4.

Note: A direct connection can be terminated with the "ThirdPartyDisconnect" method. See Section 11.3.4 for more information.

a) The /D command uses the format: /D xx [Enter], where xx is the number of one of the connected ports you want to disconnect.

b) Third party (remote) logouts can only be performed by accounts that allow admin or superuser level commands.

c) The /D command can specify both connected ports or any port. For example, if port 1 is your home port, you can use one of the following commands to separate port 3 from port 4:

/D 3 4 [Insert] or

/D 3 [Enter] or

/D 4 [input]

6-7

basic function

d) The /D command can also disconnect a remote user from the network port. This is useful in situations where a user has disconnected unsuccessfully and you don't want to wait for DSM/CPM to time out to release the TCP port. To disconnect a TCP port, type /D Nn and then press Enter. Where Nn is one of the logical TCP ports of DSM/CPM (eg /D N2 [Enter]).

3. NoActivityTimeout: Provided the timeout feature is enabled on any of the connected ports, No Activity Timeout can also disconnect the ports when no command activity is detected on the ports for the user-defined timeout period.

Note: NoActivityTimeout also applies to direct connections. See Section 7.7 for more information.

a) RS232 ports: To select the timeout for RS232 ports, enter the port configuration menu for the desired port as described in Section 7.7.

b) NetworkPort: To select the network port timeout, enter the network port configuration menu as described in Section 7.8.

c) If the timeout function is enabled, the port will automatically disconnect if no data is received within the specified timeout period.

Notes: • If two connected ports time out, exit command mode as well

separate.

• The timeout value also applies to unconnected ports that remain in command mode. If an unconnected port remains in command mode and no additional activity is detected, the port automatically exits command mode when its timeout value expires.

6-8

basic function

6.2.1.3. The Port Control Screen - Web Browser Interface In the web browser interface, the port control screen can be used to disconnect DSM/CPM serial ports that have been connected using the /C command in the text interface, as described in Section 6.2. 1.1.

To disconnect ports from the port control screen, first access the DSM/CPM command mode from the web browser interface as described in Section 6.1. Click the Port Control link on the left side of the screen to display the Port Control screen. When the port control screen appears, click the down arrow in the "Action" column for the desired serial ports, select the "Disconnect" option from the drop-down menu, and then click the "Port - Confirm Actions" button.

When the Confirm Port Actions button is pressed, DSM/CPM will display a screen listing the selected actions and asking for confirmation before continuing. To apply the selected port actions, click the Perform Port Actions button. After a short pause, DSM/CPM will display the port status screen confirming that the selected ports are disconnected.

Notes: • Port bindings cannot be created through the web browser interface. To connect DSM/CPM ports, see Section 6.2.1.1.

• When the port control screen is viewed from an account that allows administrator or superuser command access, all DSM/CPMS serial ports are displayed.

• If the Port Control screen is viewed by an account that allows user-level or view-only commands, the screen will contain only the DSM/CPMS serial ports allowed by the account.

6-9

basic function

6.2.1.4. Defining Hunt Groups - Text Interface A hunt group creates a situation where DSM/CPM scans a group of similarly named ports and connects to the first available port in the group. Hunt groups are created by assigning identical or similar names to two or more ports. Hunt groups can be defined using any-to-any, passive, buffer, or modem ports. Note that the network port cannot be included in hunt groups.

1. Access the command mode using a port and account that allows admin-level commands.

2. Enter the port configuration menu for the desired ports as described in section 7.7.

3. In the port configuration menu, set the port name.

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to assign identical names to the other ports in the hunt group. For example, a set of ports in a group could be named "ROUTER".

5. To connect to the next available port in the hunt group, invoke the /C command, using the port name to specify the desired group. Example: /C ROUTER [Enter].

6. Your port will connect to the first available port in the group. If all ports are currently connected, DSM/CPM will respond with a "BUSY" message.

7. It is only necessary to enter enough letters of the port name to distinguish hunt group ports from other ports. Enter an asterisk (*) to represent the remaining characters in the name. For example, to connect to the first available port in a port group named "SALES1", "SALES2", and "SALES3", the connect command can be issued as /C S* [Enter], provided there are no other names of doors starting with letters'.

Notes: • When the hunt group method is used by a port or account with user-level command access, the /C command only binds to ports allowed by that account.

• Hunt group names must be unique. Otherwise, ports with similar names will also be included in the hunt group.

HuntGroupExample 1:1. Ports 1 and 2 are modem mode ports and both ports have modems installed.

Port 1 is called "MODEM1" and port 2 is called "MODEM2".

2. Your permanent port is port 4. To connect to the first available modem, type /C MODEM* [Enter].

HuntGroupExample 2:1. Ports 3, 4, and 5 are any-to-any mode ports. All three ports are called "ROUTER".

2. Your permanent port is port 1. If you want to connect port 2 to the first available router, type /C 2 ROUTER [enter].

6-10

basic function

6.2.2. Passive-to-passive mode ports work the same as any-to-any mode ports, but do not allow access to command mode. A port in passive mode can be connected to other serial ports, but cannot go into command mode and therefore cannot be used to set parameters, display status, or call commands to connect ports or control power switching. Passive mode is the default on serial ports 2 and above.

Passive mode ports can be connected by accessing command mode through a free any-to-any mode port or modem and by calling the "Third Party Connect" or "Resident Connect" command, as described in Section 6.2.1.1. Passive ports do not buffer data other than baud rate conversion.

Note: To ensure access to important administrator-level command functions, passive mode is not available on port 1 (installation port) or network port.

6.2.3. Buffer mode The buffer mode allows the collection of data from different devices without requiring all devices to use the same communication parameters. In addition, buffer mode ports can also be configured to support SYSLOG, SNMP Trap and Buffer Threshold Alarm functions.

Notes: • Buffer mode ports do not have command mode access. • The buffer function is not available for port 1 (the installation port) or the network port.

6.2.3.1. Reading Data from Ports in Buffered Mode - Text Interface To check the port buffers for buffered data, access command mode from the text interface using an account that allows commands at the Administrator, SuperUser, or user level and type /S [Enter] for to display the port status screen. The Buffer Count column on the Port Status screen shows how much data is currently buffered for each port.

To retrieve data from the cache, switch to an available any-to-any or modem port, and then type the /R command in the following format: /R xx [Enter]. where xx is the port buffer number to read.

Notes: • The /R command is not available for view-only level accounts.

• Cached data can only be retrieved through the text interface. This feature is not available in the web browser interface.

• To read data from a specific port, your account must allow access to that port.

• When the /R command is called, the counter for the SNMPT trap function is also reset.

6-11

basic function

If the buffer contains data, DSM/CPM displays a prompt offering the following options:

• DisplayOneScreen: To send data one screen at a time, press [Enter]. Each time [Enter] is pressed, the next screen is sent.

• DisplayAllData: To send all data currently stored in the buffer, type 1 and press Enter.

• EraseDataonScreen: To erase the data currently displayed on the screen, type 2 and press Enter.

• EraseallData: To erase all data currently stored in the buffer, type 3 and press Enter.

• Exit: To exit read buffer mode, press [Esc].

Note: Only one user can read from a port buffer at a time. If a second user tries to save data from a port that is already reading, an error message will be sent.

To clear data from a port cache (with or without the first read), access command mode via the text interface, use an account and port that allow administrator, superuser, or user-level commands, and then type the /E (Erase Buffer Command) in the following format:

/E xx [input]

where xx is the number or name of the port buffer you want to delete.

Notes: • The /E command cannot delete data from a port buffer read from another port.

• The /E command is not available for View-only level accounts.

• Cache data can only be deleted through the text interface. The web browser interface does not provide a way to clear cached data.

6.2.3.2. Port Buffers The status screen shows the amount of buffer memory currently being used by each port. Depending on the port mode selected by the user, DSM/CPM uses the cache in two different ways.

• Any-to-Any, Passive, and Modem Mode ports: When two ports communicate at different baud rates, buffering prevents data overflow on the slower port.

• BufferModePorts: Stores data received from connected devices. The user issues a read buffer (/R) command to an any-to-any port or modem to retrieve data.

If the status screen shows a data backlog, the /E (Erase Buffer) command can be invoked to clear the buffer.

Note: If a cache mode port is reconfigured as an any-to-any, passive, or modem mode port, any data cached before the port mode change is lost.

6-12

basic function

6.2.4. Modem Modem mode provides features specific to dial-up modem communications. A modem mode port can perform all functions normally available in any mode. Modem mode is available on all DSM/CPM ports except the network port.

When a call comes in, the device prompts the caller to enter a username and password. DSM/CPM allows three attempts to enter a valid username and password. If a valid username and password is not entered within three attempts, or if the user does not respond to the login prompt within 30 seconds, the modem will disconnect.

Notes:• If a modem mode port exits command mode or the DCD line is lost while command mode is active, the DSM/CPM sends a DTR pulse to the dial-up modem. The device then sends the modem's custom command strings to ensure that the function has properly disconnected and restarted.

• The internal modem port is always set to modem mode. Note that some DSM/CPM models do not include an internal dial-up modem.

• DSM/CPM units that include the Cellular Modem option do not include a dial-up modem.

• When an external call function installs the DSM/CPM data port, other ports can use the modem for calls. To call, call the "/C" command to connect to the port, then access the function as you normally would.

6.2.5. Modem PPP ModeModem Modem PPP allows data normally sent over Ethernet to be transmitted over the telephone line. Modem PPP ports can perform all functions normally available in any mode, but Modem PPP mode also allows additional parameters related to communication to be specified. The PPP mode of the modem is not available on the network port.

6-13

basic function

6.3. Control Energy - Web browser interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

When using the web browser interface, toggle commands are accessible via the Plug Control screen and the Plug Group Control screen.

6.3.1. The Plug Control Screen - Web Browser Interface The Plug Control screen lists the on/off status of the connected outputs of the CPM Series device and is used to control plug switching and restart. To access power toggle commands, enter command mode, then click the Check Plug link on the left side of the screen to display the Check Plug screen. When the Plug Control screen appears, click the down arrow in the "Action" column for the desired plugs, then select the desired switching option from the drop-down menu and click "Confirm Plug Actions."

When the Confirm Plugin Actions button is pressed, the CPM Series device displays a screen that lists the selected actions and asks for confirmation before continuing. To perform the selected actions, click the Perform plugin actions button. The CPM series device displays a screen indicating that a switch operation is in progress, and then displays the connection status screen when the command is complete. At this point, the status screen lists the updated on/off status of each connection.

Notes: • When switching and restart operations are initiated, the start/sequence delay times as described in Section 7.6.1 apply.

• If a switch or restart command is forwarded to a connector that is already switching or restarting, the new command is queued until the connector is ready to receive more commands.

• If the Status column on the Plug Control screen contains an asterisk, it means that the plug is busy executing a command that was previously called.

• If the Plug Control screen is viewed from an account that allows administrator or superuser level commands, all changed plugs are displayed.

• When the Plug Control screen is viewed from an account that allows access to user or view commands only, the screen contains only the plugs specifically allowed by the account.

6-14

basic function

6.3.2. Plug Group Control Screen - Web Browser Interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

The Plug Group Control Screen is used to send switch and restart commands to custom Plug Groups. As described in Section 7.5, plug groups allow you to define a group of sockets dedicated to a similar purpose or client and then change commands directly to the group instead of changing one plug at a time.

To apply power toggle commands to connection groups, first access the command mode through the web browser interface (see Section 6.1). Click the Plug Group Control link on the left side of the screen to display the Plug Group Control screen. When the Plug Group Control screen appears, click the down arrow in the Action column for the desired plug-in groups, then select the desired toggle option from the drop-down menu and click the Confirm Plugin Actions button.

When the Confirm Plug Group Actions button is pressed, the CPM Series device displays a screen that lists the selected actions and asks for confirmation before continuing. To run the selected plug set actions, click the Run Plug Set Actions button. The CPM series device displays a screen indicating that a switch operation is in progress, and then displays the connection status screen when the command is complete. At this point, the status screen lists the updated on/off status of each connection.

Notes: • When switching and restart operations are initiated, the start/sequence delay times and custom plug priority values as described in Section 7.6 are applied.

• If a switch or restart command is passed to a link that is already switching or restarting with a previous command, the new command is queued until the link is ready to receive more commands.

• If the Plug Group Control screen is viewed from an account that allows administrator or superuser command access, all custom plug groups are displayed.

• If the Plug Control screen is viewed by an account that allows User or View Only commands, the screen contains only the plug groups allowed by the account.

6-15

basic function

6.4. Power control - text interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

When using the text interface, all serial port and power switching functions are accomplished by invoking simple ASCII commands. ASCII commands are also used to display status screens and exit command mode. The text interface includes a help menu that summarizes all available commands. To display the text interface help menu, type /H and press Enter.

Note: When the Help menu is viewed from an account that allows Superuser, User, or View Only commands, the screen does not contain administrator-only commands.

6.4.1. Port and Connector Status Screen - Text Interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

The Ports and Connectors Status screen lists the status of the CPM series device's serial ports and AC outputs, displays the temperature, and displays the custom site ID. News. The status screen reappears each time a command executes successfully. To view the port and plug status screen via the text interface, type /S and press Enter. DSM/CPM displays a screen showing the status of the port. To view the connection status, press [Enter] or press [Esc] to exit the Port and Connection Status screen.

6-16

basic function

6.4.2. Switch and restart commands - text interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

These commands can be used to toggle or restart the changed CPM series device plugs and can also be used to set the plugs to custom activation defaults. Links can be specified by name or number.

Notes: • If an asterisk appears in the Status column for a particular plug, it means that the plug is currently busy processing a previously issued command.

• If a switch or restart command is passed to a connector that is already busy executing a previous command, the new command is queued until the connector is ready to receive more commands.

• Administrator and superuser level accounts can use the port and plug status screen to view information about all serial ports and switched sockets.

• Accounts with user-only and view levels can use the Port and Connector Status screen only to view information about serial ports and outputs allowed by the account.

• Administrator or superuser accounts can directly send toggle and reboot commands to all plugs.

• User-level accounts can perform direct switch and reboot commands only on the plugs explicitly allowed by that account.

• The status screen is displayed after the switch and reboot commands are successfully executed.

• When switching and restart operations are initiated, the start/sequence delay times and custom plug priority values are applied as described in section 7.6.

• TextInterface commands are not case sensitive. Also, when used in on/off/reboot command lines, plug names and plug group names are not case sensitive.

When performing switch and reboot commands, the CPM series device displays a "Are you sure?" Enter the command line, wait for the user's response, and then execute the command. The device pauses for a while while the command executes and then returns to the port and connection status screen.

To change plugs or start a reboot cycle, do the following:

1. Plug(s) On: To turn on a plug or group of plugs, type /ON n and press Enter. Where "n" is the number or name of the desired connection or socket group. For example:

/ON 1 [Enter] oder /ON ROUTER [Enter]

6-17

basic function

2. SwitchPlug(s)Off: To disable a plug or group of plugs, type /OFF n and press Enter. Where "n" is the number or name of the desired connection or socket group. Note that the /OFF command can also be entered as /OF. For example:

/OFF 2 [Enter] oder /OF ROUTER [Enter]

3. RebootPlug(s): To start a boot cycle, type /BOOT n and press [Enter]. Where "n" is the number or name of the desired connection or socket group. Note that the /BOOT command can also be entered as /BO. For example:

/BOOT 3 [Enter] ή /BO ATMSWTCH [Enter]

4. SetAllPlugstoPowerUpDefaults: Type /DPL and press Enter. All plugins allowed by your account will be set to the default enabled/disabled state, which is set from the Plugin Parameters menu as described in Section 7.6.

Notes: • If you accessed the command mode using an account that allows command access at the administrator or superuser level, the default command is applied to all plugs.

• If you accessed the command mode using an account that only allows user-level command access, the default command will only apply to the plugs specifically allowed by that account.

• Toggle commands are not available in ViewOnly mode.

5. SuppressCommandConfirmationPrompt: To execute a boot/on/off command without displaying the "Sure?" message. Prompt, you can either disable command confirmation from the System Parameters menu or add the ",Y" option to the end of the command line. For example:

/TO ROUTE,Y oder /BOOT 2,Y

6-18

basic function

6.4.2.1. Apply commands to multiple plugs - text interface

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. DSM series devices do not support power control functions.

As described below, the switch and reset commands can only be applied to a switched AC outlet or a range of outlets.

Note: When switching and restart operations are initiated, the start/sequence delay times and custom plug priority values are applied as described in section 7.6.

1. Toggle multiple plugs: To apply a command to multiple plugs, enter the plug numbers or names, separated by a "plus sign" (+) or a comma (,). For example, to disable pins 1, 3, and 4, type one of the following commands:

/OFF 1+3+4 [Enter]ή

/OFF 1,3,4 [Intro]

Note: When using "+" or "", do not include spaces between the plug name or number and the plus sign or comma.

2. SwitchaSeriesofPlugs: To apply a command to a series of plugs, enter the number for the plugs that mark the beginning and end of the series, separated by colons. For example, to enable plugs 1 through 3, type:

/ON 1:3 [Input]

3. All Plugs: To apply a command to all plugs, type an asterisk in place of the name or number. For example, to launch all plugins, type:

/BO * [input]

Note: If this command is called from an account that only allows user-level command access, it will only be applied to the sockets allowed for that account.

6-19

basic function

6.5. manual operation

In addition to the command-based functions available through the web browser interface and the text interface, some DSM/CPM functions can also be controlled manually. See Section 2.7 for a summary of the front panel controls.

6.6. Logging out of command mode

When you have finished communicating with DSM/CPM, it is important to always log out using the Log Out link (web browser interface) or the /X command (text interface) rather than simply closing the browser window or closing the program communication.

Logging out using the LogOut connection or the /X command ensures that DSM/CPM has fully exited command mode and does not wait for an idle timeout before allowing further connections.

6.7. emergency shutdown function

CPM Series devices also have an emergency shutdown feature that can be used to immediately turn off all outputs on a CPM Series device in the event of an emergency. For more information on the EPO feature, contact WTI Technical Support at[emailprotected].

7-1

7. Configuration Options

This section describes the basic configuration process for all DSM/CPM series devices.

7.1. configuration menu

Although the web browser interface and the text interface (command line interface) provide two separate means of selecting parameters, both interfaces provide access to the same set of basic parameters, and parameters selected through one interface also apply to the other. To access the configuration menus, do the following:

• TextInterface: Display the help screen (/H), then type the appropriate command to access the desired menu. When the configuration menu appears, enter the number of the parameter you want to set and follow the instructions in the submenu that appears.

• WebBrowserInterface: Use the links and menus on the left side of the screen to access the desired configuration menu. To change the parameters, click the desired field and enter the new value or select a value from a drop-down menu. To apply newly selected parameters, click the Change Parameters button at the bottom of the menu or the Set button next to the field.

The following sections describe options and parameters that you can access through each configuration menu. Note that essentially the same parameters and options are available for both the web browser interface and the text interface.

Notes:• To access the configuration menus, follow the procedure described in Section 6.1.

• The configuration menus are only available if you are logged in to command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. Superuser accounts can view configuration menus but cannot change parameters.

• Configuration menus are not available when communicating with DSM/CPM via a mobile device

• When setting parameters through the text interface, be sure to press the [Esc] key several times to completely exit the configuration menu and save the newly set parameters. When parameters are set via the text interface, the newly set parameters are not saved until the Save Configuration message appears and the cursor returns to the message.

7-2

setting options

7.2. Set the system parameters

The System Parameters menus are used to set the Site ID message, set the system clock and calendar, set logging functions, and calibrate temperature readings. In the text interface, the System Parameters menu is also used to create and manage user accounts and passwords.

To access the System Parameters menu via the text interface, type /F and press Enter. To access the System Settings menu through the web browser interface, hover over the General Settings link, wait for the System Settings menu to appear, and then click the System Settings link . The system settings menus are used to set:

• User List: With this function user accounts and passwords can be displayed, added, changed and deleted. As discussed in Section 7.3 and Section 7.4, the User Directory allows you to set the security level for each account and specify which connections and ports each account is allowed to control.

Note: The User Directory option does not appear in the System Parameters menu of the web browser interface. In the web browser interface, user accounts are defined using the Configure User Settings link on the left side of the screen.

• SiteID: A text field generally used to note the installation location or name of the DSM/CPM unit. (Up to 64 characters, default = undefined)

Notes: • Site ID will be deleted when DSM/CPM is reset to default settings.

• When viewed through the text interface (CLI), site ID messages longer than 30 characters are truncated. To view the entire Site ID message via the text interface, type /J* and press Enter.

• RealTimeClock: This prompt provides access to the Real Time Clock menu, used to set the clock and calendar, and to enable and configure NTP (Network Time Protocol) functionality, as described in Section 7.2.1.

Note: The Real Time Clock option does not appear in the System Settings menu of the web browser interface. In the web browser interface, real-time clock parameters are set through the Real-Time Clock submenu, accessible through the General Parameters menu.

• InvalidAccessLockout: If required, this feature can be used to disable access to the DSM/CPM command mode after a user-specified number of failed login attempts. See Section 7.2.2 for more information. (Default = Off)

Note: The Invalid Access Lock item does not appear in the System Parameters menu of the web browser interface. In the web browser interface, the Invalid Access Lockout parameters are set through the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout submenu, which is accessible through the General Parameters menu on the left side of the screen.

7-3

setting options

• TemperatureFormat: Specifies whether the temperature will be displayed in Fahrenheit or Celsius. (Default = Fahrenheit)

• Temperature Calibration: Used to calibrate the device's internal temperature sensing capabilities. To calibrate the temperature, place a thermometer on your equipment rack in a location that typically has the highest temperature. After a few minutes, take the reading from the thermometer and then enter the reading into the configuration menu. In the web browser interface, the temperature is entered in the "System parameters" menu in the "Temperature calibration" field. In the text interface, the temperature is entered in a submenu of the System Parameters menu, accessed via the Temperature Calibration item. (default = undefined)

• LogConfiguration: Configures the audit log, alarm log, and temperature log. See Section 7.2.3 for more information on event logging features. (Default = Audit Logging = Enabled without System Logging, Alarm Logging = Enabled without System Logging, Temperature Logging = Enabled)

Notes: • The audit log creates a record of all power switching and restart activities on the DSM/CPM module, including restarts and switching operations caused by load shedding, load shedding recovery, unresponsive restarts, and scheduled restarts.

• The alarm log creates a record of all instances where an alarm has been activated or cleared in the DSM/CPM module.

• The temperature log creates a record of the ambient temperature over time. For CPM series devices that have power measurement options, the recorded temperature information is displayed in the power measurement log file.

• CPM series units with the power monitoring option also include a power measurement log and a power measurement log. See Section 7.2.3 for more information.

• CallbackSecurity: Enables and configures the callback security feature as described in Section 7.2.4. Additionally, for this feature to work properly, a callback number must be defined for each desired user account, as described in Section 7.4. (Default = On - Redial without password prompt, 3 attempts, 30 minute delay)

Notes: • In the text interface, callback security parameters are set through a submenu of the System Parameters menu, accessible through the Callback Security item.

• In the web browser interface, callback security parameters are set through the Callback Security submenu, which can be accessed from the General Parameters menu on the left side of the screen.

• FrontPanelButtons: This component can be used to disable all functions of the front panel buttons. (Default = On)

• Analog ModemPhoneNumber: If the DSM/CPM has the optional internal dial-up modem, this parameter can be used to record the phone number. When DSM/CPM is used in conjunction with the WMU Enterprise Management Solution, WMU will retrieve the telephone number specified here for use when contacting the entity by telephone. (default = undefined)

7-4

setting options

• ScriptingOptions: Provides access to the parameters used to configure the DSM/CPM module to run various scripts as described in Section 7.2.5.

Notes: • The functions provided in the Script Options menu are intended for use in applications where scripts are used to control DSM/CPM operation. Improper use of the Script Options menu functions can cause the DSM/CPM module to become unresponsive. Before attempting to use any of the functions provided in the Script Options menu, contact WTI Technical Support as described in the Appendix of this User Guide.

• In the text interface, the Script Options submenu is accessible from the System Parameters menu. To access the Script Options parameters through the web browser interface, hover over the General Parameters link, wait for the startup menu to appear, and then click the Script Options link.

• Power Configuration: (CPM-C series only) In the web browser interface, the "Voltage Calibration", "Power Factor" and "Power Efficiency" parameters are set through the "System Parameters" menu. In the text interface, these parameters are in a separate submenu, accessed through the Power Configuration option. See Section 7.2.6 for more information on power configuration.

• EnergyWiseConfiguration: (CPM Series devices only) Defines the parameters required for a CPM Series device to function as a component in a Cisco® EnergyWise™ network. This item can be used to set the following parameters:

Note: • EnergyWise configuration options are only available on CPM series units. EnergyWise configuration options are not available on DSM series devices.

• In the web interface, you can access the EnergyWise configuration options from the escape menu under General Parameters.

Enable: Enables/disables the CPM Series device's ability to participate in a Cisco Energywise network. (Default = Off)

Domain: The Energywise domain name. up to eighty characters long. (Default = Undefined)

Secret: A password used to authenticate each element in a Cisco Energywise network. The Secret parameter can be up to eighty characters long. (Default = Undefined)

• AssetTag: Allows a descriptive tag or tracking number to be assigned to the DSM/CPM entity. Once the asset tag is set, it can be viewed from the product status screen in the web interface or by using the /J* command in the text interface. (Default = Undefined)

7-5

setting options

• LoginBanner: Allows you to set a banner/message to be displayed when you enter a valid username and password during login. The login banner may be used to post legal warnings about unauthorized device access or to display other custom information or instructions. (Default = Undefined)

Notes: • Although the login banner is displayed when accessing DSM/CPM through both the text interface and the web browser interface, the login banner can only be set through the text interface.

• The login banner can be up to 1024 characters long.

• The login banner text must match the commandstart with the command as wellend.

• Banner text can be copied and pasted from a text editor or sent from a file.

• For best results, each line of text in the link banner should be less than 80 characters wide.

7.2.1. Real Time Clock and Calendar The Real Time Clock menu is used to set the DSM/CPM's internal clock and calendar. The real-time clock configuration menu offers the following options:

• Date: Sets the month, date, year and day of the week.

• Time: Sets the hour, minute, and second for the DSM/CPM real-time clock/calendar. Enter the time in 24-hour format (military format).

• Time Zone: Sets the time zone relative to Greenwich Mean Time. Note that the time zone setting works differently depending on whether the NTP feature is enabled and configured correctly or not. (Default = GMT (no DST))

NTPEnabled: The timezone setting is used to adjust the Greenwich Mean Time value (obtained from the NTP server) to determine the exact local time for the selected time zone.

NTPDdisabled: If disabled or if the device cannot access the NTP server, status screens and activity logs list the selected time zone and real-time clock value, but the correction factor is not applied to the real-time clock value .

• NTPEnable: If this option is enabled, the DSM/CPM will contact an NTP server (defined via NTP address messages) once a day and update its clock based on the NTP server time and selected zone hour. (Default = Off)

Notes: • DSM/CPM will also contact the NTP server and update the time when you change the NTP parameters.

• In order for the DSM/CPM to immediately communicate with the NTP server at any time, ensure that the NTP function is enabled and configured. Then type /F and press Enter. When the System Parameters menu appears, press [Esc]. DSM/CPM stores parameters and then attempts to communicate with the server as indicated by the currently defined NTP parameters.

7-6

setting options

• PrimaryNTPAddress: Specifies the IPv4 and/or IPv6 IP address or domain name for the primary NTP server. (default = undefined)

Notes:• To use domain names for web addresses, the DNS server parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.3.

• The web browser interface contains two separate fields that can set both IPv4 protocol and IPv6 protocol format “Primary NTP Address” and “Secondary NTP Address”.

• If the primary NTP address and secondary NTP address are set through the text interface, DSM/CPM will display a prompt instructing the user to select IPv4 or IPv6 protocol.

• With DSM/CPM, parameters for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols can be defined and saved.

• SecondaryNTPAddress: Specifies the IP address or IPv4 and/or IPv6 protocol domain name for the secondary alternate NTP server. (default = undefined)

Notes:• To use domain names for web addresses, the DNS server parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.3.

• The web browser interface contains two separate fields that can set both IPv4 protocol and IPv6 protocol format “Primary NTP Address” and “Secondary NTP Address”.

• If the primary NTP address and secondary NTP address are set through the text interface, DSM/CPM will display a prompt instructing the user to select IPv4 or IPv6 protocol.

• With DSM/CPM, parameters for IPv4 and IPv6 protocols can be defined and saved.

• NTPTtimeout: The time in seconds that elapses between each attempt to communicate with the NTP server. If the first attempt fails, DSM/CPM retries the connection four times. If neither the primary nor the secondary NTP server responds, DSM/CPM will wait 24 hours before attempting to contact the NTP server again. (Default = 3 seconds)

• TestNTPServers: Allows you to ping the IP addresses or domain names defined through the Primary and Secondary NTP Address prompts, or ping a new address or domain defined through the Test NTP Servers submenu to verify that a valid IP address or domain name.

Notes: • For the Test NTP Server feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

• In addition to the "Test NTP Server" option, the "/TEST" command in the text interface or the "Test" option in the web browser interface can also be used for each custom IP address to ensure that the IP address responds.

7-7

setting options

7.2.2. The Serial Port Invalid Access Block feature When properly configured and enabled, the Invalid Access Block feature can monitor all connection attempts. If the counter for any of these attempts exceeds the user-defined Maximum Invalid Attempts limit, the corresponding port or protocol is automatically disabled for the time period specified by the Lockout Duration parameter.

When invalid serial port access monitoring is enabled, DSM/CPM counts invalid serial port access attempts. When the number of invalid access attempts exceeds the specified lock attempt trigger value, DSM/CPM locks the installation serial port for the specified lock duration. If checking invalid access attempts is selected, a lock is triggered when the number of invalid access attempts during the specified lock duration exceeds the specified number of hits for the log file. For example, if the number of SSH visits is set to 10 and the SSH lock duration is set to 120 seconds, DSM/CPM will lock the generated MAC address if it detects more than 10 invalid access attempts within 120 seconds and excessive attempts to 120 seconds.

Note that if the access lock is invalid, you can either wait for the lock duration to expire (after which DSM/CPM will automatically re-enable the port or protocol), or you can issue the /UL command (type /UL and press [ Enter]) through the text interface to instantly unlock all DSM/CPM logical network ports and communication protocols.

Notes:• If the serial port invalid access lock alarm has been enabled as described in Section 9.5, DSM/CPM can also provide notification via email, syslog message, and/or SNMP trap if a serial port invalid access lock occurs .

• If the network port is locked by the Invalid Access Lock feature, it will continue to ping (provided ping has not been disabled on the network port).

In the Invalid Access Blocking configuration menus, you can select the following parameters:

• SerialPortProtection(SerialPortLockout): Enables/disables the invalid access lockout feature for the installation serial port and selects lockout parameters. If this item is enabled and excessive invalid access attempts to the installation port are detected, the installation port will be locked until the user-defined lockout time expires or until the /UL command is issued.

• SerialPortProtection: Enables/disables the "Invalid Access Lock" feature for the installation serial port. (Default = Off)

• LockoutAttempts: The number of invalid attempts that must be made in order to trigger the "Invalid Access Lockout" function on the installation serial port. (Default = 9)

• LockoutDuration: This option selects the length of time the installation serial port will remain locked when an invalid access lock occurs. If the duration is set to infinity, the ports remain blocked until the /UL command is issued. (Default = 30 minutes)

7-8

setting options

• SSHProtection: Enables/disables and configures the Invalid Access feature for SSH connections. If this item is enabled and excessive invalid SSH access attempts are detected, DSM/CPM will lock the offending MAC address for the user-defined SSH lock duration or until the /UL command is issued. Note that lockout activation for SSH protection is a function of the SSH Hit Count parameter and the SSH Lockout Duration parameter.

• LockoutEnable: Enables/disables invalid access lockout protection for SSH connections. (Default = Off)

• SSHHitCount: The number of invalid attempts that must be made during the time period specified by the SSH block period in order to enable the SSH invalid hits block function. For example, if the SSH Hit Count parameter is set to 10 and the SSH Lockout Duration parameter is set to 30 minutes, DSM/CPM will lock out the bad MAC address for 30 minutes if there are more than 10 invalid access attempts within 30 minutes minute interval. (Default = 20)

• SSHLockoutDuration: This option selects both how long an SSH lockout remains in effect and how long invalid access attempts are counted. If an SSH lockout occurs, the malformed MAC address will be blocked from establishing an SSH connection to DSM/CPM for the specified SSH lockout period. (default = 2 seconds)

• TelnetProtection: Enables/disables and configures the Invalid Access feature for Telnet connections. If this item is enabled and excessive invalid telnet access attempts are detected, DSM/CPM will lock the problematic MAC address for the user-defined telnet lock period or until the /UL command is issued. Note that the lockout activation for Telnet protection is a function of the Telnet Hit Count parameter and the Telnet Lockout Duration parameter.

• LockoutEnable: Enables/disables invalid access lockout protection for Telnet connections. (Default = Off)

• TelnetHitCount—The number of invalid attempts that must be made during the period specified by Telnet Block Duration to enable the Telnet invalid hits block feature. For example, if the "Telnet Hit Count" parameter is set to 10 and the "Telnet Lockout Duration" parameter is set to 30 minutes, DSM/CPM will lock out the bad MAC address for 30 minutes if there are more than 10 invalid accesses attempts within 30 minutes. (Default = 20)

• TelnetLockoutDuration: This option selects both the length of time that a Telnet lockout remains in effect and the length of time that invalid access attempts are counted. When a telnet lock occurs, this MAC address is prevented from telnetting to DSM/CPM for the specified telnet lock duration. (default = 2 seconds)

7-9

setting options

• WebProtection: Enables/disables and configures the Invalid Access feature for web connections. If this item is enabled and excessive invalid web access attempts are detected, DSM/CPM will ban the offending MAC address for the user-defined Web Block Duration or until the /UL command is issued. Note that web protection lockout activation is a function of the Web Hit Count parameter and the Web Lockout Duration parameter.

• LockoutEnable: Enables/disables invalid access lockout protection for web connections. (Default = Off)

• WebHitCount: The number of invalid attempts that must be made during the period specified by the Web Block Duration to trigger the Web Access Block feature. For example, if the "Web Access Count" parameter is set to 10 and the "Web Lock Duration" parameter is set to 30 minutes, DSM/CPM will lock that MAC address for 30 minutes if there are more than 10 invalid access attempts within 30 minutes. (Default = 20)

• WebLockoutDuration: This option selects both how long a web lockout remains in effect and how long invalid access attempts are counted. When a web lock occurs, the affected MAC address cannot establish a web connection to the DSM/CPM for the specified web lock duration. (default = 2 seconds)

7-10

setting options

7.2.3. Log File Configuration This feature allows you to create a record of command activity, alarm actions, and temperature readings for the DSM/CPM module. Logging features are enabled and configured through the system settings menus. Depending on the specific model number, the DSM/CPM can display several event logs, such as the audit log, alarm log, current measurement log, power measurement log, power history log, and temperature recording:

• AuditLog: Creates a log of all port connect/disconnect, power switch, and reboot activities on the DSM/CPM module, including reboots and switches caused by load shedding, load dump recovery, no-ping reboots, and scheduled reboots. In addition, the audit log also includes login/logout entries for all users and login/logout entries for the serial ports. Each log entry includes a description of the activity that caused the trigger, port connection, connection, or restart, the username for the account that initiated the action, and the date each event occurred.

Note: Power-swapping features, reboot features, load shedding, no-ping reboots, and scheduled reboots are only available on CPM Series devices. Power related features are not available on DSM series devices.

• AlarmLog: Creates a record of all alarm activity in the DSM/CPM module. Whenever an alarm is raised or cleared, DSM/CPM creates a record that includes the time and date of the alarm, the name of the alarm raised, a description of the alarm, and the time and date the alarm was cleared.

• CurrentMeteringLog: (Available only on CPM series units with the current metering option) The Current Metering screen displays current, voltage and temperature readings as a function of time. In the web browser interface, the current history can be viewed as a graph or downloaded in ASCII, CSV or XML format. In the text interface, the current history can be viewed as plain ASCII data or downloaded in CSV or XML format. See Section 10.6 and Section 10.7 for more information on configuration options for the current measurement log.

• PowerMeteringLog: (Only available on CPM series units with power metering option) The Power Metering Log (power area status screen) can be used to view power consumption measurements over a user-selected time period for the series unit CPM-C. See Section 10.6 and Section 10.7 for more information on power measurement log configuration options.

• PowerHistoryLog: (Available only on CPM series units with power metering option) The Power History Log shows power consumption over time. See Section 10.5 for more information about the action history log display options.

• TemperatureLog: Provides a log of temperature levels over time on the device. Each log entry includes the time and date as well as the temperature value.

Note: For CPM series units that have the power measurement option, the temperature log is displayed as part of the power measurement log.

7-11

setting options

7.2.3.1. The configuration options for the audit log and the alarm log. In the "System parameters" menu you can select three different configuration parameters for the audit log and the alarm log. Note that the audit and alarm logs operate independently and parameters selected for one do not apply to the other.

• Off: the protocol is disabled. Command activities and/or alarm events are not logged.

• On-WithSyslog: The log file is enabled. Power on/off, restart activities and/or alarm events are logged. DSM/CPM generates a syslog message whenever a log record is created.

• On-WithoutSyslog: The log file is enabled. Power-up, restart activity, and/or alarm events are logged, however, DSM/CPM does not generate a syslog message each time a log record is generated. (Default setting)

Notes: • Power control functions are only available on CPM series units. Implementation

Features are not available on DSM series devices.

• In order for the audit log or alarm log to generate syslog messages, the logger parameters must first be set as described in Section 12.

• The audit log truncates usernames longer than 22 characters and displays colons (..) instead of the remaining characters.

7.2.3.2. The temperature log file In the "System parameters" menu you can either enable or disable the temperature log file. When temperature logging is disabled, the DSM/CPM does not record temperature readings. In the default state, the temperature log is enabled.

Note: For CPM-C series units, the temperature log is displayed as part of the current measurement log.

7.2.3.3. Reading, Downloading and Deleting Log Files To read or download the status logs, proceed as follows:

• TextInterface: Type /L and press Enter to access the View Log menu. Enter the number for the option you want, press [Enter], and then follow the instructions in the submenu that appears.

• WebBrowserInterface: Place your mouse pointer over the Logs link on the left side of the screen. When the flight menu appears, click the Download or View option you want.

To delete log data, access the command mode through the text interface using an account that allows administrator-level commands. Then type /L and press Enter to access the View Logs menu and do the following:

• AuditLog: From the Display Logs menu, type the number for the Audit Log option and press Enter. When the audit log menu appears, enter the erase function number, press Enter, and follow the instructions in the submenu that appears.

• Alarm Log: From the View Logs menu, type the number for the Alarm Log option and press Enter. When the Alarm Log menu appears, enter the delete mode number, press Enter, and follow the instructions in the submenu that appears.

7-12

setting options

• Temperature Log: From the View Logs menu, type the number for Temperature Log and press Enter. When the Temperature Log menu appears, enter the number of the delete function, press enter and follow the instructions in the submenu that appears.

Notes: • DSM/CPM maintains a fixed amount of internal storage for audit logs. If log records are allowed to accumulate until this memory is full, the memory will eventually "wrap up" and older records will be replaced by newer records.

• Note that some deleted records cannot be recovered. • For CPM series units that have the power measurement option, the temperature log is displayed as part of the power measurement log.

7-13

setting options

7.2.4. Callback Security: The callback feature provides an added layer of security when callers attempt to access command mode using a dial-up modem. If this feature is configured correctly, dial-up modem users will not have immediate access to command mode after entering a valid password. Instead, the device disconnects and calls a user-specified number before allowing access through that number. If desired, users can also be prompted to re-enter the password after calling DSM/CPM.

For callback security to work properly, you must first enable and configure the feature as described in this section, and then set a callback number for each desired user account as described in Section 7.4.

To access the Callback Security menu through the text interface, type /F, press Enter, and then select the Callback Security option. To access the Callback Security menu from the web browser interface, hover over the General Settings link, wait for the pop-up menu to appear, and then click the "Callback Security" link. In both the text interface and the web browser interface, the callback security menu offers the following options:

• CallbackEnable: This prompt offers five different configuration options for the callback security feature: (Default = On - Callback (no password prompt))

Disable: All callback security is disabled.

Callback (WithoutPasswordPrompt): Callbacks are performed for user accounts that include a callback number and the login prompt is not displayed if the user's modem answers. If the account does not include a callback number, that user has immediate access and no callback is performed.

On Callback (WithPasswordPrompt): Callbacks are performed for user accounts that include a callback number and the login prompt is displayed when the user's modem answers (accounts that include a callback number must re-enter their username/password when their modem answers. ) If the account does not contain a callback number, that user has direct access and no callback is performed.

On-CallbackONLY (WithoutPasswordPrompt): Callbacks are performed for user accounts that include a callback number and the username/password prompt is not displayed when the user's modem answers. Accounts that do not include a callback number cannot access the command function through the modem.

On-CallbackONLY (WithPasswordPrompt): Callbacks are performed for user accounts that include a callback number and the username/password prompt is displayed when the user's modem answers (users must re-enter the username/password when their modem wakes up ). Answers.) Accounts that do not include a callback number cannot access command mode through the modem.

• Callback Attempts: The number of times DSM/CPM attempts to contact the callback number. (Default = 3 attempts)

7-14

setting options

• CallbackDelay: The time DSM/CPM waits between callback attempts. (Default = 30 seconds)

Notes: • After configuring and enabling callback security, you must set a callback number for each desired user account (as described in Section 7.4) for this feature to work properly.

• If you use the On Callback (with password prompt) option, remember that accounts that do not include a callback number are allowed to access the command feature without a callback confirmation.

7.2.5. Script Options The Script Options submenu provides access to parameters used to configure the DSM/CPM module to run various scripts.

• To access the script options parameters through the text interface, first type /F and press Enter to display the System Parameters menu. Then type the number for the Script Options item and press Enter.

• To access the Script Options parameters through the web browser interface, place your cursor over the General Parameters link, wait for the startup menu to appear, and then click the Script Options link.

In the Script Options menu, the following parameters can be set:

• Confirm Commands: (CPM series units only) If this option is enabled, a "Safe" prompt will appear before disabling and restarting commands. If this option is disabled, commands are executed without further prompting. (Default = On)

• AutomatedMode: (CPM series devices only) When this option is enabled, the device performs switch and reboot commands without displaying a confirmation prompt, status screen, or confirmation messages. See Section 7.2.5.1 for more information. (Default = Off)

Note: When automated mode is enabled, security features are hidden and users can access configuration menus and control sockets without entering a password. If there is a security concern and automated operation is required, it is recommended to use the IP-Tables feature (Section 7.8.1.2) to restrict access.

• CommandPrompt: Allows the text interface prompt to be set to either DSM, CPM, IPS, RSM, TSM, or the currently specified site ID. News. (Default for DSM series = DSM, Default for CPM series = CPM.)

7-15

setting options

• IPSMode: (CPM series modules only) This parameter can be used to configure CPM series modules for use with command scripts written for WTI IPS series remote reset switches. When IPS mode is enabled, the message "IPS" is displayed in text mode, user accounts do not allow specifying a username, and only the message "Password" is displayed when logging into the device (devices in IPS mode). does not display a "username" prompt.) (Default = Off)

• The IPS prompt appears in text mode.

• If no administrator-level user accounts are set, the device does not display username or password prompts when logging in in command mode.

• If one or more administrator-level user accounts are set, the CPM series device only displays the password prompt when logging in in command mode. If all administrator-level user accounts (except the default "Super" account) are deleted, the CPM series unit will revert to a state where no username or password prompts are displayed when logging into command mode.

• EPO: (CPM series units only) Enables/disables the EPO feature. With the CPM Series, the emergency shutdown feature can be used to immediately turn off all designated outputs on a CPM Series unit in the event of an emergency. See Section 6.7 for more information. (Default = Off)

• EmergencyShutoffAutoRecovery: (CPM series units only) Enables/disables the automatic emergency shutdown feature. If this option is enabled, after an EPO all plugs will revert to the on/off state selected before the EPO. (Default = Off)

• SinglePlugBootDelayEnable: (CPM series devices only) When enabled, the currently set boot/sequence delay value is applied when a single plug is rebooted and to the last plug in a plug group when an entire plug group is rebooted. This allows you to set the "shutdown time" used when restarting an individual plug or the last plug in a group of plugs. See Section 7.6 for more information on the start/sequence delay parameter. (Default = Off)

• U-BootPlugsEnable: (CPM series devices only) If this option is enabled, CPM will enable all plugs after a power failure before the CPM OS is fully loaded. This means that connected devices such as servers and routers can be powered up again as soon as possible after a power outage. (Default = Off)

• TCPHoldWriteOptions: These options can be used to minimize the number of data packets sent by the DSM/CPM module. In cases where the DSM/CPM receives a slow stream of data from a connected device, the TCP wait-write options can be set to set the size of each packet and set a maximum "wait time" to determine the duration of the data. allowed to accumulate in the buffer before being sent.

• TCPHoldWriteEnable: Enables/disables TCP Hold Write. (Default = Off)

• TCPHoldWriteDuration: The maximum amount of time (in 40ms intervals) that data is allowed to accumulate before transmission. (Default = 2)

• TCPHoldWriteBufferSize: Specifies the size of the TCP hold write buffer. When the amount of accumulated data reaches the currently specified write buffer size, buffered data is sent. (Default = 512 characters)

7-16

setting options

• VoltageLossDelay Options: (CPM series modules only) Determines how CPM series modules with dual power inputs respond when power is lost on one input. Power loss delay options allow the device to automatically disable outputs and delay the power loss alarm when power is lost to an input.

• TurnPlugsOffEnable: If this option is enabled, after a power failure on an input, the device waits for the specified power loss delay time and then turns off all outputs on the branch supported by the input that lost power. (Default = Off)

• Power Loss Delay: Defines how long the device will stop before generating a power loss alarm and shutting down the outputs after a loss of power to one of the inputs. (Default = 12 seconds)

• ReverseDNS: Defines how ARP requests are processed. When this option is enabled (On), the device checks an external DNS to resolve domain names. When this option is disabled (Disable), the device does not check external DNS when resolving domain names. (Default = On)

• Port1ModeOverride: To ensure local access to DSM/CPM command functions, serial port 1 can normally only be configured as a passive mode or any-to-any mode port. If Override Port 1 Mode is enabled, serial port 1 can be configured as a buffer mode port, modem mode port, or PPP modem mode port. (Default = Off)

Note: Configuring serial port 1 as a buffer mode port may disable local access to DSM/CPM command functions through the serial port.

• USBState: Enables/disables the installation port in USB mini format. See Section 7.8.1 for instructions on configuring the USB mini port. (Default = On)

• ResetUnit: (Web interface only) Resets the operating system of the DSM/CPM unit. To restore the DSM/CPM module via the text interface, invoke the /I command as described in Section 18.3.3.

Note: The reset function provided through the Script Options menu and the /I command does not disable power to the DSM/CPM module. The boot mode only reboots the DSM/CPM operating system.

• ModemHuntTelnet: This option allows DSM/CPM to support modem pooling in conjunction with third-party Serial Port Redirector software, as described in Section 7.2.5.2. (Default = Off)

• ModemHuntRaw: Identical to Modem Hunt Telnet, except that this feature uses a raw socket connection. See Section 7.2.5.2 for more information. (Default = Off)

Note: The ModemHuntTelnet option is recommended for transferring ASCII data and the ModemHuntRaw option for transferring binary data.

• KeepAlive: In cases where Linux regularly times out and loses network communication with the device, this parameter can be used to keep the network connection alive. (Default = 7,200 seconds)

7-17

setting options

7.2.5.1. Automated mode (CPM series devices only) Automatic mode allows CPM series devices to execute switch and reboot commands without displaying menus or generating response messages. Automated mode allows the CPM to be controlled by a device that can generate commands to control power switching functions without human intervention.

When automated mode is enabled, power-off and reboot commands are executed without prompting for confirmation and without command response messages. The only response to these commands is the prompt, which reappears after each command is completed.

Although the automated mode can be enabled through either the web browser interface or the text interface, the automated mode is primarily intended for users who wish to send ASCII commands to the CPM without operator intervention and is therefore not specific to the browser interface tissue. When automated mode is enabled, the web browser interface can still be used to call toggle and restart commands.

Notes:• When automated mode is enabled, password prompts are not displayed at login, and you can access administrator-level command functions (including configuration menus) and control plugs without entering a password.

• If you need to enable the automated mode, but want to restrict network access to the configuration menus, it is recommended to enable and configure the IP Tables feature as described in Section 7.8.1.2.

• Auto mode is not available on DSM series devices.

To enable/disable Automatic mode, go to the System Parameters menu (see Section 7.2), then go to the Script Options menu and set the Automated mode option to On. When enabled, CPM features change as follows:

1. AllPasswordSecuritySuppressed: When a user tries to access command mode, the password prompt does not appear on either the installation port or the network port. Unless specifically restricted by the IP security feature, all users have access to the command mode and all commands are accepted immediately without requiring a password to be entered.

2. StatusScreenSuppressed: The plug status screen is not displayed automatically after commands are successfully executed. Note, however, that the /S command can still be called to display the status screen if needed.

3. "Are you sure?"PromptSuppressed: All commands are executed without asking the user for confirmation.

4. ErrorMessagesSuppressed: Most error messages are suppressed. Note, however, that an error message will still be generated if commands are invoked with invalid formats or arguments.

All other show status and configuration commands continue to work as usual.

7-18

setting options

7.2.5.2. Modem Pooling The "Modem Hunt Telnet" and "Modem Hunt Raw" parameters allow DSM/CPM to support modem pooling in conjunction with third-party serial port redirection software. This allows you to connect external modems to multiple DSM/CPM serial ports and then use DSM/CPM to automatically find a free modem when you need to make an outgoing connection.

The Modem Hunt Telnet and Modem Hunt Raw options work as follows:

ModemHuntTelnet: Offers three different configuration options: Off (disabled), On - no password, and On - password. Each of the Enable options selects a default port number for the modem pool:

• On-NoPassword:Usesportnumber2300.

• On-Password: Use the sports number 2100. Note that if password is enabled, you will be prompted for a valid DSM/CPM username and password.

ModemHuntRaw: Offers three different configuration options: Off, On - No Password and On - Password. Each of the Enable options selects a default port number for the modem pool:

• On-NoPassword:Usesportnumber3300.

• On-Password: Use the sports number 3100. Note that if password is enabled, you will be prompted for a valid DSM/CPM username and password.

To use the modem pooling features, DSM/CPM must be configured as follows:

• Telnet access and/or RawSocket access must be enabled ("Network Settings" menu).

• ModemHuntTelnet and/or ModemHuntRaw must be enabled ("Network Settings" menu).

• The Port Mode (Port Parameters menu) for each DSM/CPM serial port connected to an external modem must be set to Modem Mode.

• DirectConnect must be enabled (Port Parameters menu) for each DSM/CPM serial port connected to an external modem.

In addition, you must obtain the following information from DSM/CPM and enter it into the Serial Port Redirector software:

• The port number (see above) for the desired DSM/CPM Modem Hunt Telnet or Modem Hunt Raw option.

• The IP address in IPv4 or IPv6 format for the DSM/CPM module.

To establish an outgoing modem connection, start the communications program (eg PuTTy, TeraTerm, etc.), select the virtual COM port defined through the Serial Port Redirector software, and then make a call as usual .

7-19

setting options

7.2.6. Power Configuration (CPM-C Series units only) The Power Configuration menu allows you to adjust the power measurements to get a more accurate determination of the “real power” being consumed by the devices connected to the CPM-C Series unit. The active power is determined by the following equation:

Active Power = (Voltage * Amps) * Power Factor

energy efficiency

To set power configuration parameters, use an account to access command mode, which provides access to administrator-level commands, and then enable the System Parameters menu.

Notes: • Current and power measurement functions are only available on the CPM-C series

Units.• In the text interface, power source configuration parameters are set through the Power Configuration menu.

• In the web browser interface, power source configuration parameters are selected from the System Parameters menu.

The following power source configuration parameters are available:

• Voltage Calibration: This option is used to calibrate the voltage display on the CPM-C front panel. To calibrate the voltage, first determine the approximate voltage, then select "Calibrate Voltage" and enter the correct voltage. In the web browser interface, the voltage is entered in the Voltage Calibration field in the System Parameters menu. The voltage is entered in the text interface in a submenu of the menu system parameters. (default = undefined)

• PowerFactor: Can be any value between 0.1 and 1.00. (Default = 1.00)

• PowerEfficiency: Can be any integer from 1% to 100%. (Default = 100%)

7-20

setting options

7.3. user accounts

Every time you try to access command mode, you will be prompted for a username (login) and password. The username and password entered at login determine which serial ports and connectors you are allowed to control and which type of commands you are allowed to invoke. Each username and password combination is defined as a "User Account". DSM/CPM allows up to 128 user accounts. Each account includes a username, password, command access level, port/connection access rights, service access rights, and an optional callback number.

7.3.1. Command Access Levels To limit access to basic command functions, DSM/CPM allows you to set the command access level for each user account. DSM/CPM offers four different levels of access: Administrator, SuperUser, User, and View Only. Command permissions for each user account are set via the Add User or Modify User menus. Each access level grants permission to use a different set of commands. Lower access levels are not allowed to invoke configuration commands, while administrators have access to all commands. The four levels of access are described below:

Note: Power switching functions are only available on CPM series units. Performance related functions are not present in DSM series devices.

• Administrator: Administrators are allowed to access all configuration and operation commands, view all status screens and connect to all serial ports at any time, and issue switching commands to all switching outputs of the DSM/CPM.

• SuperUser: SuperUsers are allowed to invoke all port binding and power toggle commands and view all status screens. SuperUsers can see configuration menus, but are not allowed to change configuration parameters. SuperUsers have access to all serial ports and switch outputs.

• Users: Users are allowed to invoke port binding and power toggle commands and view all status screens, but can only apply commands to the ports and sockets to which they are specifically granted access. Users are not allowed to view configuration menus or change configuration parameters.

• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are allowed to view status menus, but are not allowed to invoke port binding and power toggle commands, and cannot view configuration menus or change parameters. ViewOnly accounts can view the port/connection status screens, but can only view the status of ports and connections allowed by the account.

Section 18.2 summarizes command access for all four access levels.

In the default state, DSM/CPM includes a predefined account that provides access to administrator commands and allows control of all DSM/CPM serial ports and serial outputs. The default username for this account is super (lowercase) and the password for the account is also super.

Notes: • It is recommended to create a new user account with administrator access during the initial installation of the device and then delete the default "super" account.

• If DSM/CPMI is reset to default settings, all user accounts will be deleted and the default "Super" account will be restored.

7-21

setting options

7.3.2. Assigning Access to Serial Ports Each account can be granted access to a different set of ports. Also note that multiple accounts can be granted access to the same port. When accounts are created, the Port Access parameter in the Add User or Change User menu can be used to grant or deny access to any serial port for that account.

Additionally, each command access level is also used to limit the serial ports that the account is allowed to access:

• Administrator: Accounts with administrator access are always allowed to control all serial ports. Port access cannot be disabled for administrator-level accounts.

• SuperUser: SuperUser accounts allow access to all serial ports. Port access cannot be disabled for SuperUser accounts.

• User: Accounts with user-level access are only allowed to make connections to the serial ports specifically allowed through the Port Access parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus.

• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to connect to serial ports. ViewOnly accounts can see serial port status, but are limited to the ports specified by the account.

7.3.3. Assigning access to plugs Each account can have access to a different selection of sockets (plugs) and groups of plugs. When creating accounts, the Plugin Access and Plugin Group Access parameters in the Add User or Modify User menu can be used to grant or deny that account access to any plugin or plugin group.

Note: Power switching functions are only available on CPM series units. Power control functions are not present in DSM series devices.

In addition, each command access level also restricts the plugs and plug groups that the account is allowed to access:

• Administrator: Accounts with administrator access are always allowed to control all plugs and plug groups. Access to the plugin cannot be disabled for admin-level accounts.

• SuperUser: By default, SuperUser accounts allow access to all plugs and plug groups. Plugin access cannot be disabled for SuperUser accounts.

• User: Accounts with user-level access are only allowed to issue switch and restart commands to the plugs and plug groups that are explicitly allowed through the Plugin Access parameter in the Add User and Modify User menus.

• ViewOnly: Accounts with ViewOnly access are not allowed to issue switch and reboot commands on sockets or socket groups. ViewOnly accounts can see the status of plugs and plug groups, but are limited to the plugs and plug groups specified by the account.

7-22

setting options

7.4. Manage user accounts

The user directory feature allows you to create new accounts, view settings for existing accounts, modify accounts, and delete accounts. Up to 128 different user accounts can be created. The user directory feature is only available if you are logged in in command mode with an account that allows administrator commands.

In both the text interface and the web browser interface, the user configuration menu offers the following functions:

• ViewUserDirectory: Displays the currently defined parameters for each DSM/CPM user account as described in Section 7.4.1.

• AddUsername: Creates new user accounts and allows you to assign a username, password, command level, permissions, and callback number as described in Section 7.4.2.

• ModifyUserDirectory: This option is used to edit or change account information as described in Section 7.4.3.

• DeleteUser: Deletes user accounts as described in Section 7.4.4.

Note: After selecting or editing account settings, be sure to save your new account information before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the "Add User" button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the “Save Configuration” message and the cursor returns to the message.

7.4.1. View User Accounts The View User List option allows you to view details for each account. The "Show users" option does not show actual passwords, instead it shows "specified" in the password field. The View User Accounts feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands.

7.4.2. Add User Accounts The Add Username option allows you to create new accounts. Note that the Add User feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands. The Add User menu can set the following parameters for each new account:

• Username: Up to 32 characters long and cannot contain non-printable characters. Duplicate usernames are not allowed. (default = undefined)

• Password: Five to 16 characters and cannot contain non-printable characters. Note that passwords are case sensitive. (default = undefined)

7-23

setting options

• Authorization Key: This item allows you to assign an SSH authorization key to the user account, view the assigned authorization keys, or delete the assigned authorization keys. If a valid authorization key is assigned to a specific user, that user can access the DSM/CPM command mode without entering a password. When issuing an authorization key, DSM/CPM offers the ability to set a name for the key and upload a key from the user's server. (default = undefined)

• AccessLevel: Specifies which commands this account can access. This option allows the access level for this account to be set to Administrator, Superuser, User or View Only. See Section 7.3.1 and Section 18.2 for more information on command access levels. (Default = User)

• PortAccess: Specifies which DSM/CPM serial ports this account is allowed to access. (Default settings, Administrator and SuperUser = All ports enabled, User and ViewOnly = unspecified)

Notes: • Administrator and superuser level accounts always have access to everyone

Serial ports.

• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view serial port status, but are limited to the ports specified by the account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to create connections between ports.

• The Port Access parameter is also used to grant or deny users access to the modem's internal port.

• PlugAccess: (CPM series devices only) Defines which sockets this account is allowed to control. (Default settings, Administrator and SuperUser = All sockets enabled, User and View Only = undefined)

Notes: • PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices

There are no control functions on DSM series devices.

• Administrator and superuser level accounts always have access to all plugs.

• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the enabled/disabled status of plugs, but are limited to the plugs specified by the account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switch and restart commands.

7-24

setting options

• PlugGroupAccess: (CPM series modules only) Specifies which plug groups this account is allowed to control. Socket groups allow you to define a selection of outlets and then quickly assign those sockets to new accounts by giving the account access to the socket group. See Section 7.5 for more information about connector pools. (default = undefined)

Notes: • PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices

There are no control functions on DSM series devices.

• To be able to use this function, plug groups must first be defined as described in Section 7.5.

• Administrator and superuser level accounts always have access to all plug groups.

• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the enabled/disabled status of plug groups, but are limited to the plug groups specified by the account. ViewOnly accounts are not allowed to invoke switch and restart commands.

• ServiceAccess: Specifies whether this account can access command mode via serial port, Telnet/SSH, or Web, and whether or not the account is allowed to initiate outgoing connections. For example, if telnet/SSH access is disabled for this account, this account cannot access command mode via telnet or SSH. (Default = Serial Port = Enabled, Telnet/SSH = Enabled, Web = Enabled, Outbound Access = Disabled.)

Note: The Service Access parameter is only used to select allowed access services for a user account. To enable/disable all SSH/Telnet access individually for the DSM/CPM module, see Section 7.8.1.

• Current/Power Metering: (CPM-C series units only) Enables/disables this account's access to current and power metering functions. (Default = Off)

Note: Power/power metering features cannot be disabled for administrator or superuser level accounts.

• CallbackPhoneNumber: Assigns a number to be called when this account attempts to access command mode via the modem and the callback security feature has been enabled as described in Section 7.2.4. (default = undefined)

Notes: • If the callback phone number is not specified, no callbacks will be made

performed for this user.

• If the callback phone number is not defined for a particular user and the callback security feature is set to use one of the On Callback options, that user has direct access to command mode through the modem.

• If the callback phone number is not set for a specific user and the callback security feature is set to use the "Callback ONLY" option, that user cannot access the modem command feature.

• If you use the On Callback (Prompt for Password) option, remember that accounts that do not include a callback number can access command mode without a callback confirmation.

7-25

setting options

7.4.3. Modify User Accounts The Modify User Directory feature allows you to edit existing user accounts to change parameters, port and plug permissions, or management command capabilities. Note that the Switch User feature is only available if you entered command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands. After accessing the Modify User menu, use the menu options to redefine the parameters in the same manner used for the Add User menu, as described in Section 7.4.2.

Note: After you finish changing the settings, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the "Change User" button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the message "Save Configuration".

7.4.4. Delete user accounts With this function, individual user accounts can be deleted. Note that the Delete User feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands.

Notes: • Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.

• DSM/CPM allows you to delete the default "super" account included in the initial command mode access. Before deleting the "super" account, be sure to create another account that allows administrator access. If you do not maintain at least one account with administrator access, you will not be able to call commands at the administrator level.

7-26

setting options

7.5. The plug group directory

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The plug group directory does not exist on DSM series devices.

The socket group directory allows you to specify groups of sockets that are related to similar functionality, likely to be toggled or restarted at the same time, or controlled by the same type of user account.

For example, a single rack of equipment may contain a number of devices belonging to different departments or customers. To simplify the process of granting plug access rights to the accounts that control the power of these devices, you can assign all the plugs for the devices belonging to Department A to a plug group called Dept_A for the Devices belonging to Department B of a group plug named "Dept_B". With defined user accounts, you can quickly assign the appropriate user accounts for Dept.A access to all sockets for Dept_A devices by simply granting access to the Dept_A socket group, rather than selecting the specific, individual sockets for each Dept.A user account

Similarly, plug groups allow you to issue enable/disable/start commands to a number of plugs without dealing with each plug individually. Using the example above, you could quickly reboot all the plugs for Dept A either by pasting the plug group name "Dept_A" into a /BOOT command line via the text interface or by using the Plug Group Control menu via the web browser.

The Plug Group Directory feature is only available if you are logged in in command mode with an account that allows administrator commands. The Plug Group Directory menu offers the following functionality in both the text interface and the web browser interface:

• ViewPlugGroupDirectory: Displays the currently defined plug access rights for each DSM/CPM plug group as described in section 7.5.1.

• AddPlugGrouptoDirectory: Creates new plug groups and allows you to assign plug access rights to each group, as described in Section 7.5.2.

• ModifyPlugGroupDirectory: This option is used to edit or change plug access permissions for each plug group, as described in section 7.5.3.

• DeletePlugGroupfromDirectory: Deletes plug groups that are no longer needed, as described in Section 7.5.4.

7-27

setting options

7.5.1. Show login application groups

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The plug group directory does not exist on DSM series devices.

The View Plug Group List option allows you to view the configuration of each plug group. Note that the View Plugin Group Directory feature is only available if you have access to the command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands.

7.5.2. Adding plug groups

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The plug group directory does not exist on DSM series devices.

The Add Plug Group to Directory option allows you to create new plug groups and assign plug access rights to each group. Note that the Add Plugin Group feature is only available if you have access to command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands. The following parameters can be set for each new account via the "Add Plugin Group" menu:

• PlugGroupName: Assigns a name to the plug group. (default = undefined)

• PlugAccess: Specifies which plugs this plug group is allowed to control. (default = undefined)

Notes: • In the text interface, plug access is configured by selecting item 2 and then

From the submenu that appears, select the connections you want.

• In the web browser interface, plug access is set up by selecting the desired plugs from a list of all plugs in the Add Plug Group menu.

• After setting or editing the plug group parameters, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the Add Plugin Group button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the “Save Configuration” message and the cursor returns to the message.

7-28

setting options

7.5.3. Change connection groups

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The plug group directory does not exist on DSM series devices.

The Change Plug Group feature allows you to edit existing plug groups to change plug access rights. Note that this feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands. After accessing the Change Plugin Group menu, use the menu options to redefine the parameters in the same way as for the Add Plugin Group menu, as described in Section 7.5.2.

Note: After changing or editing the parameters, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the Change plugin groups button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the “Save Configuration” message and the cursor returns to the message.

7.5.4. Delete connection application groups

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The plug group directory does not exist on DSM series devices.

This function can be used to delete individual connection groups. Note that this feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands.

Note: Deleted accounts cannot be automatically restored.

7-29

setting options

7.6. Set the plug parameters

Note: Power control functions are only available on CPM series units. The "Plug Parameters" menu is not available for DSM series devices.

The Plug Parameters menu is used to define plug names, start/sequence delay times, and activation defaults for all AC power outlets on the CPM Series device. Note that this feature is only available if you have access to Command mode with a password that allows admin-level commands.

To set plug parameters via the text interface, type /PL and then press Enter to display the plug parameters menu. To set plugin parameters through the web browser interface, click the Plugin Parameters link on the left side of the screen to display the Plugin Parameters menu.

In the Plug Parameters menu you can set the following parameters:

• PlugName: Up to 16 characters. (Default settings for outlets 1 to 8 = Outlet1 – Outlet8)

• Boot/Seq.Delay: When more than one plug is powered or a reboot cycle starts, the boot/seq.delay determines how long it is until the next plug is powered. When the start/sequence delay is applied, DSM/CPM will wait the user-defined delay time before activating the next connection. This gives the device connected to the first outlet time to "wake up" enough before the device connected to the next outlet is powered. When restart cycles and toggle actions start, the start/sequence delay is applied as follows: (default = 0.5 seconds)

RebootCycleDelay: During a reboot cycle, the CPM series device first disables all selected plugs (with a 0.5 second pause between each "disable" operation) and then begins to re-enable the selected plugs, leaving a pause for the user. Fixed start/sequence delay before next plug is activated. For example, if the start/sequence delay for plug 3 is ten seconds, CPM will pause for ten seconds before proceeding to the next plug.

Sequence Delay "On": When two or more plugs are activated, the CPM series device pauses for the user-defined start/sequence delay before activating the next plug.

7-30

setting options

• PowerUpDefault: Determines how this plug responds when the Default All Plugs (/DPL) command is called or after power is removed and then restored from the device. After the default command is called or power is restored, the DSM/CPM will automatically enable or disable each plug as specified in the enable default. (Default = On).

Notes: • If you accessed the Command mode using an account

Admin or superuser level command access, then the default command will be applied to all switch plugs.

• If you accessed the command mode from an account that has user-level command access, the default command will only apply to the plugs allowed by your account.

• The default command is not available for View-only level accounts.

• BootPriority: When commands are applied to two or more plugs, the Boot Priority parameter determines the order in which the plugs are activated. The plug assigned boot priority "1" is always activated first, then the plug assigned boot priority "2" and so on. If you assign a boot priority to a specific plug, the priority is reduced by one for all subsequent plugs. For more information about the boot priority parameter, see Section 7.6.1. (Default = All slots are prioritized by connection number)

7-31

setting options

7.6.1. The Boot Priority Parameter When an "on" or "reboot" command is invoked, CPM series devices typically activate their pins in their default numerical order. Although in many cases the default numerical order works well, there are also cases where a single device (eg a router) needs to be enabled first to support a second device that will be enabled later.

The boot priority parameter simplifies the order in which plugs are activated by assigning each plug a priority number, rather than requiring the user to ensure that devices always connect to the DSM/CPM in a specified order. As new devices are added to your equipment shelf, the boot priority parameter eliminates the need to disconnect all existing devices and then rearrange the slots connected to the DSM/CPM (and re-configure the slot parameters) to ensure they are enabled in the desired Series.

Remarks:

• Power control functions are only available on CPM series devices. The Boot Priority parameter does not exist on DSM series devices.

• No two slots can be assigned the same boot priority number.

• If a higher boot priority has been assigned to a particular plug, the boot priorities of all subsequent plugs are reduced by 1.

• Boot priority is also displayed on the plug status screen.

7.6.1.1. Example 1: Change plug 3 to priority 1. In the example shown in Figure 7.1, we start with all plugs set to their default startup priorities, with plug 1 first, plug 2 second, and so on.

The startup priority for plug 3 then changes to priority 1. This means that after a reboot, Plug 3 will now be powered by the first, Plug 1 will be powered by the second, Plug 2 will be powered by the third, and so on.

Note that if the boot priority for plug 3 is set to 1, the boot priorities for all plugs that were previously booted before plug A1 are now reduced by a factor.

(Plug No.) Priority

(1) 1

(2) 2

(3) 3

(4) 4

BEFORE

(Plug No.) Priority

(1) 2

(2) 3

(3) 1

(4) 4

AFTER (assign connection 3 to priority 1)

Figure 7.1: Example of boot priority 1

7-32

setting options

7.6.1.2. Example 2: change pin 4 to priority 2. In the second example in Figure 7.2, we start with the boot priorities for the pins set as they were at the end of example 1. Link 3 is first, link 1 is second, link 2 is the third and link 4 is the fourth.

The startup priority for Plug 4 then changes to Priority 2. This means that after a reboot, Plug 3 will still be powered first, but now Plug 4 will be second, Plug 1 third, and Plug 2 second quarter.

Note again that if Plug 4's boot priority is set to 2, the boot priorities for all plugs previously booted before Plug 4 are now reduced by a factor

(Plug No.) Priority

(1) 2

(2) 3

(3) 1

(4) 4

BEFORE

(Plug No.) Priority

(1) 3

(2) 4

(3) 1

(4) 2

AFTER (assign slot 4 to priority 2)

Figure 7.2: Boot priority - example 2

7-33

setting options

7.7. Configuring the serial interface

The Serial Port Configuration menus allow you to select parameters for the DSM/CPM serial ports as well as the internal modem port.

Serial ports can be configured to connect to a local computer or modem. In addition, the Serial Port Configuration menu can also be used to set communication parameters, disable administrator-level commands, and select a number of other serial port parameters, which are described in Section 7.7.2.

Consider the following when responding to prompts, invoking commands, and selecting items from port configuration menus:

• Configuration menus are only available for admin-level accounts.

• If you are configuring DSM/CPM via modem, the modem parameters will not change until you exit command mode and log off from the device.

• For a description of the USB mini port configuration process, please refer to Section 7.8.1.

• On DSM-8 and CPM-800 series devices, port 9 is the optional internal dial-up modem port or the optional internal cellular modem port.

• On CPM-1600 series devices, port 17 is the optional internal dial-up modem port or the optional internal cellular modem port.

• For DSM-24 series devices, port 25 is the optional internal dial-up modem port or the optional internal cellular modem port.

• For DSM-40 series devices, port 41 is the optional internal dial-up modem port or the optional internal cellular modem port.

• The analog modem port is not present on DSM model numbers that contain the letters "NM" or on CPM model numbers that end with the letter "N".

• Optional internal dial-up/analog functionality is not available on DSM/CPM series devices that include the optional internal cellular modem.

7-34

setting options

7.7.1. RS232 Port Modes DSM/CPM offers five different serial port modes:

• Any-to-AnyMode: Allows communication between connected ports and provides access to command mode. Any-to-any ports can be connected to other any-to-any, passive, buffer, or modem ports by invoking the /C command. Any-to-Ay mode is available for all ports (except the internal modem port) and is the default port mode for port 1.

• Passive mode: Allows communication between connected ports, but does not allow access to command mode. Passive mode ports can be connected by accessing command mode through an available any-to-any mode port or modem and calling the /C command. Passive mode is not available on port 1, network port, or internal modem port and is the default mode on port 2 and above.

• BufferMode: Allows buffering of data received from connected devices. Collected data can be retrieved by accessing command mode through an available any-to-any mode port or modem and issuing the read buffer (/R) command. In addition, buffer mode ports can also be configured to support the syslog and SNMP trap features discussed in Section 13 and Section 14. Buffer mode is not available on port 1, the network port, or the internal modem port.

• ModemMode: Allows communication between connected ports, provides access to command mode, and simplifies connection to an external modem. Modem mode ports can perform all functions normally available in any mode. However, the modem mode also allows setting a hang string, a reset string, and an initialization string, as well as other modem-related parameters. Modem mode is not available on the network port and is the default mode for the internal modem port (if present).

• ModemPPPMode: Allows data normally sent over Ethernet to be transmitted over the telephone line. The modem's PPP mode ports can perform all the functions normally available in any mode. However, the PPP modem function also allows setting a post string, a reset string, an initialization string, an IP address, and other parameters related to communication. The PPP mode of the modem is not available on the network port. If the cellular modem option is present, the cellular modem port is always set to PPP modem mode

See Section 6.2 for more information on port functions.

7-35

setting options

7.7.2. The Serial Port Configuration Menu: To configure the DSM/CPM serial ports via the text interface, type /P n and then press Enter (where n is the name or number of the desired port). To configure serial ports using the web browser interface, click the "Configure Serial Port" link on the left side of the screen, then use the drop-down menu to select the desired port.

In the "Serial Port Configuration" menu, the following parameters can be set. Note that all of these parameters are available through both the text interface and the web browser interface, and parameters selected through one interface are also applied to the other.

Notes: • If the Cellular Modem option is present, the /P command can also be used

can be used to access the Cell Modem Parameters menu. To access the Cell Modem Parameters menu, type /p modem, press Enter and proceed as described in Section 7.8.1.1.

• The parameters set for the serial setup port are not applied to the Mini SetUp USB port. For information on configuring the Mini SetUp USB port, see Section 7.8.1.

Communication settings:

• BaudRate: Any standard rate from 300 bps to 230 kbps. (Default settings, Serial Ports 1 to 8 = 9600 bps, Internal Modem Port = 57.6000 bps)

• Bit/Par: (Default = 8-None)

• StopBits: (Default = 1)

• Handshake mode: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS (Hardware), Both or None. (Standard = RTS/CTS)

General parameters:

• AdministratorMode: Allows/denies port access for administrator-level accounts. If this option is enabled (Allow), the port is allowed to invoke admin-level commands as long as they are issued by an account that allows them. When disabled (deny), accounts that allow commands at the administrator level are not allowed to access the commands function through this port. (Default = Allow)

Note: Administrator mode cannot be disabled on serial port 1 (installation port).

• LogoffCharacter: The logoff character specifies the commands or characters that must be output to this port to log off. Note that the disconnect symbol does not apply to direct connections. (Default = ^X)

• SequenceDisconnect: Enables/disables and configures the Resident Disconnect command. This provides the ability to turn off sequence splitting and select a single or three character format. (default = one character)

7-36

setting options

• InactivityTimeout: Enables and selects the timeout period for this port. When enabled, the serial port will disconnect if no additional data activity is detected for the timeout. (Default = 5 minutes)

Notes:• When the idle timeout is disabled, sports can automatically reconnect after a power failure. When power is restored, previously connected port pairs are automatically reconnected, provided the idle timeout is disabled on both ports and both ports have been connected for at least ten minutes prior to the power failure.

• The only exception to this rule is serial port 1, which remains disconnected after power is restored to provide a free serial port to access local command mode.

• CommandEcho: Enables or disables command echo on this serial port. When this option is disabled, commands sent to the serial port will still be invoked, but the actual keys will not appear on your screen. (Default = On)

• AcceptBreak: Specifies whether the port accepts interrupts received from the connected device. When enabled, interrupts received on the port are forwarded to whatever port that port is connected to. If disabled, interrupts on this port will be rejected. (Default = On)

PortMode Parameters:

• PortName: Allows you to assign a name to the serial port. (Default settings, Serial ports 1 and above = unspecified; Internal modem port (if present) = MODEM)

• PortMode: The operating mode of this port. (Default settings, Serial Port 1 = Any-to-Any Mode; Serial Ports 2 and above = Passive, Internal Modem Port (if present) = Modem Mode)

Notes: • Passive and Buffering functions are not available on serial port 1 (the installation port).

• The port mode for the internal modem port (if present) can only be set to modem mode.

• DSM/CPM series devices that include the cellular modem option do not include the dial-up internal modem option.

• On DSM/CPM series devices that have the cellular modem option, the port mode for the cellular modem port is always ModemPPP. In this case, the ModemPPP parameters are not user-specified but are determined when connecting to the network.

7-37

setting options

Depending on the port mode selected, DSM/CPM will also display the additional messages listed below. In the text interface, these parameters are accessible through a submenu that is only active when the corresponding port mode is selected. In the web browser interface, the fields are "greyed out" unless the appropriate port mode is selected.

Any-to-AnyModeandPassiveMode: Allows communication with a local computer and allows access to command mode. If any-to-any or passive mode is selected, the following mode-specific parameters can also be set:

DTROoutput: Defines how DTR reacts when the connection to the port is lost. DTR can be low, hold high, or pulse for 0.5 seconds and then hold high. (default = pulse)

BufferMode: When buffer mode is selected, the following mode-specific parameters can be set:

Date/TimeStamp: Enables/disables time/date stamping for cached data on this port. When this option is enabled, DSM/CPM adds a time/date stamp every time five seconds pass between received data items. (Default = On)

BufferConnect: If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM will continue to cache data collected while connected to this buffer mode port. (Default = Off)

DTROoutput: Defines how DTR reacts when the connection to the port is lost. DTR can be low, hold high, or pulse for 0.5 seconds and then hold high. (default = pulse)

ModemMode: Provides access to command mode and simplifies connecting to an external dial-up modem. Modem ports can perform all the functions normally available in any mode, but modem mode also allows you to specify a shutdown string, a reset string, and an initialization string:

Note: When communicating with DSM/CPM via dial-up modem, the modem mode parameters do not change until you exit command mode and log off.

ModemResetString: Resets the modem reset string. The reset string can be sent before the initialization string. (Default = ATZ)

ModemInitializationString: Specifies a command string that can be sent to initialize a modem with the settings required by your application. (Default = AT&C1&D2S0=1&B1&H1&R2)

ModemHang-UpString: Although DSM/CPM pulses the DTR line to hang up a connected modem, the hang-up string is often useful for testing modems that do not use the DTR line. (default = undefined)

Reset/NoDialtoneInterval: Defines the periodic modem reset duration (which determines how often the reset string is sent to the modem on this port) and also defines the trigger value for the No Dial alarm. If this value is set to 0, the alarm will not work without a ringtone. For more information on the No Dial Tone alarm, see Section 9.11. (Default = 15 minutes)

7-38

setting options

NoDialtoneAlarmEnable: Enables/disables no dial tone alarm. This item must be enabled for the silent alarm to work. For more information on the No Dial Tone alarm, see Section 9.11. (Default = Off)

Reset/NoDialtoneScaler: Specifies the number of periodic modem reset sequences that must occur to initiate a no dial tone check. If this parameter is set to "0", the alarm will not work without a ringtone. When both this parameter and reset/no dial tone interval are set to a value from 1 to 99 and the No Dial Tone alarm is enabled, DSM/CPM starts after an interval equal to the specified Reset/No Dial Tone. corresponds to a "No dial tone" check. The interval value is multiplied by the Reset/No Dialtone Scaler value. (Default = 16)

ModemPPPMMode: Allows data normally sent over Ethernet to be sent over the telephone line. When PPP modem mode is selected, the following modem-related parameters are available:

Note: • When communicating with DSM/CPM via modem, the modem's PPP mode parameters do not change until you exit command mode and log off.

• Only one serial port on the DSM/CPM series unit can be configured for PPP modem operation at a time.

ResetString: Resets the modem reset string. The reset string can be sent before the initialization string. (Default = ATZ)

InitializationString: Specifies a command string used to initialize the modem with the settings required for PPP communication (default = ATQ0V1E1S0=0&C1&D2).

Hang-UpString: Although DSM/CPM pulses the DTR line to hang up a connected modem, the hang-up string is often useful for testing modems that do not use the DTR line. (default = undefined)

NoDialtoneAlarmEnable: Enables/disables no dial tone alarm. This item must be enabled for the silent alarm to work. For more information on the No Dial Tone alarm, see Section 9.11. (Default = Off)

7-39

setting options

PeriodicResetLocation: The IP address or URL of the website used to keep the PPP connection alive when not in use. DSM/CPM will periodically ping the selected IP address or URL to keep the connection alive. (default = undefined)

Notes:• To select a domain name as the location for periodic resets, you must first define the domain name servers as described in Section 7.8.3.

• The "IP Address", "P-t-P" and "Subnet Mask" parameters are not user-defined and are automatically provided by the ISP when a PPP communication is initiated.

PPPPhoneNumber: The phone number for the line used for PPP communication. (default = undefined)

Username: The username for the ISP account used for PPP communication. (default = undefined)

Password: The password for the ISP meter used for PPP communication (default = unspecified)

IP Address: The temporary IP address assigned to the PPP communication session by the ISP. Note that this item is not user-definable and is automatically provided by the ISP when a PPP communication session starts. (default = undefined)

P-t-P: Note that this element cannot be set by the user and is automatically provided by the ISP when starting a PPP communication session. (default = undefined)

SubnetMask: Note that this element cannot be set by the user and is automatically provided by the ISP when a PPP communication session starts. (default = undefined)

7-40

setting options

• Heartbeat: The Heartbeat parameter can be used in conjunction with the Communication Lost alarm to provide notification when a WTI device connected to one of the DSM/CPM serial ports is down. Normally, the DSM/CPM periodically sends the heartbeat message to a connected WTI device. If the connected device does not respond to the heartbeat message, DSM/CPM can notify you via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap, as described in Section 9.3. Note that heartbeat mode is only available when the DSM/CPM serial port is configured for "Any-to-Any" mode. (Default = Off)

Notes: • Heartbeat mode only works if the port is configured for any-to-any operation. To use communication loss notification, all destination ports must be configured for any-to-any operation.

• For the loss of communication alarm to work, you may need to update the firmware on the remote WTI device.

Network Services:

• DirectConnect: With Direct Connect, users can access DSM/CPM and automatically establish a connection between the network port and a specific serial port by including the appropriate port number in the connect command (e.g. port 5 = 2105). See Section 11.3 for more information. As described below, the Direct Connect feature offers three options. (Default = Off)

Off: Users cannot use the Direct Connect feature to connect to this port.

On-NoPassword: Users can use the Direct Connect feature to connect to this port without entering a password.

On-Password: Users can use Direct Connect to connect to this port, but must enter a password before the connection can be established.

Off-BreakonRawDisconnect: The port sends a break character when a raw socket connection to the port is terminated. Note that this feature works with both the No Password and Password options, as described in Section 11.3.2. By default, this feature is disabled. No break character is sent when a raw socket connection is terminated.

Note: If On-Password is selected and administrator-level commands are disabled on the network port, only accounts that do not allow administrator-level commands are allowed to connect directly through the network port. If admin-level commands disable the specified port, that port will not allow access to accounts that allow admin-level commands.

When the Port Parameters menu is accessed through the text interface and the Direct Connect feature is enabled, the menu also lists both Direct Connect port numbers for that port (the port numbers are not listed in the web browser interface).

7-41

setting options

TelnetPort: The Telnet port number used to connect directly to this port using the standard Telnet protocol.

SSHPort: If Direct Connect (object 31) is set to On - Password, this row displays the port number used to establish a direct connection to this port using the SSH protocol. See Section 11 for more information.

RawPort: The port number used to establish a direct connection to this port using the raw socket protocol.

• Syslog: The syslog function is used to generate records for each buffer event. When event logs are generated, they are sent to a syslog daemon at an IP address set by the Network Parameters menu. For more information, see Section 12. The Syslog feature offers three possible settings. (Default = Off)

Disable: The logging system is disabled. (Predefined)

On-NotConnected: Messages are generated only when a user is not connected to a buffered port (either via /C or direct connection). This prevents information collected by the connected device from being inserted into syslog messages while a user is connected to a buffered port.

On-Always: All information collected is sent via syslog message. whether a user is logged in or not.

Notes: • Syslog is only available on buffer mode ports.

• This option is not available for serial port 1 because port 1 cannot be configured as a buffer mode port.

The Port Parameters menu also provides two additional items that allow you to set the priority of syslog messages generated by this port:

Facility: The facility with which this port logs messages. (Default = Local_0)

Level: The severity (or priority) of messages generated by this port. (Default = Emergency)

• BufferThreshold: Enables/disables buffer threshold mode for buffer mode ports and sets the level that generates buffer threshold traps and/or alarms on this port. Setting it to 0 (zero) disables SNMP traps on this port.

If the Buffer Threshold parameter is set to a value of 1 (1) or greater, the Buffer Threshold feature is enabled and traps are sent to SNMP managers when the buffer for this port reaches the specified threshold. For more information, see Section 13. If a storage limit is set, this also enables the use of the cache threshold alarm as described in Section 9.7. (Default = Off/0)

Note: • The Buffer Threshold feature only applies to buffer mode ports.

• This option is not available for serial port 1. This is because port 1 is reserved as an installation port and cannot be configured as a buffer mode port.

7-42

setting options

• IPAlias: Assigns an IP address of your choice to the serial port. When the serial port is assigned an IP address, users can essentially connect directly to the serial port without having to enter a password first. (default = undefined)

Notes: • The IP Alias feature is only available when the Direct Connect feature is set to On-Password or On-NoPassword.

• To view the assigned IP alias for each serial port via the text interface, type /SA and press [Enter].

• To view the IP alias status through the web browser interface, hover over the Port Status link on the left side of the screen, wait for the flyout menu to appear, and then click the "Alias Status" link ".

7-43

setting options

7.7.3. Copy Parameters to Multiple Serial Ports (Text Interface Only) When configuring DSM/CPM via the text interface, the /CP (Copy Parameters) command can be used to select identical parameters for one or more serial ports. When the /CP (Copy Port Parameters) command is invoked, the device displays a menu that allows you to select and copy parameters to all or multiple DSM/CPM serial ports. The Copy Port Parameters menu allows you to set all parameters for the specified ports or to set only a selected set of parameters for a specific group of ports.

Notes:• The /CP command is not available through the web browser interface.• The /CP command does not copy any parameters to the network port.• The /CP command is only available for accounts and ports that allow it

Administrator level commands.• The /CP command cannot be used to set port 1 to passive or temporary mode

to disable admin mode on port 1.

To copy parameters to all or multiple RS-232 serial ports, do the following:

1. Access the DSM/CPM command mode via the text interface using an account and port that allows access to administrator-level commands.

2. Invoke the /CP command at the command line. The Copy Parameters menu appears. The following command line options are available:

a) CopytoAllPorts: Type /CP [Enter].

b) Copy to a port range: Type /CP m-n [Enter]. where m and n are the port numbers indicating the desired range. For example, to copy parameters to ports 3 through 7, type /CP 3-7 and press Enter.

c) CopytoSeveralPorts: Type /CP m,n,x [Enter]. where m, n and x are the port numbers you want. For example, to copy parameters to ports 3, 5, and 7, type /CP 3,5,7 [Enter].

d) Combination: To invoke the /CP command in a way that specifies a range of ports and multiple ports outside the range, type /CP m,n,x-z [Enter]. where m, n, x and z are port numbers. For example, to copy parameters to ports 3 and 5 and ports 7 to 9, type /CP 3,5,7-9 [Enter].

3. Select parameters: To select the parameters to copy, enter the number of the desired parameter, press [Enter], and then follow the submenu instructions.

4. ClearMenu: After setting many parameters, if you want to clear the /CP menu and start over, type - (hyphen) and press Enter. The menu is reset.

5. ExitWithoutCopy: To exit the Copy Parameters menu without copying selected parameters, type X [Enter]. DSM/CPM returns to the prompt.

6. Copy parameters: When you finish selecting parameters, press [Esc] to copy the selected parameters.

7. DSM/CPM will display a confirmation prompt before executing the copy command. Type Y to continue or N to cancel the command, then press Enter.

7-44

setting options

7.8. network configuration

The Network Parameters menus are used to select parameters and options for the network port and also allow you to implement various security and authentication functions. To access the network settings menus, do the following:

In the "Network parameters" menu you can set the parameters described in the following sections. Although the web browser interface and the text interface allow you to specify essentially the same parameters, the parameters are arranged differently in the two interfaces. In the text interface, most network parameters are set via a menu. However, in the web browser interface, the network parameters are separated into separate menus that you can access from the Network Configuration menu.

Notes: • Network settings depend on your network configuration. Contact your network administrator for appropriate settings.

• The Network Parameters menu selects parameters for all logical network ports.

• The IP address, subnet address and gateway address cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change these parameters, you must access the device via the text interface.

• If a new IP address is selected or the DHCP mode status is changed, the device disconnects and reconfigures with the new values when exiting the Network Settings menu. When configuring the device, ensure that your DHCP server assigns you a known, stable IP address to simplify reconnecting to the device once the new address is assigned.

• The Network Parameters menu is only available if you are logged in in command mode with an account and port that allow admin-level commands (admin mode enabled).

7-45

setting options

The Network Configuration Menus: The Network Configuration menus allow you to set both IPv4 and IPv6 parameters for the primary DSM/CPM Ethernet port (Eth0), as well as the optional secondary Ethernet port (Eth1, if present) and the optional cellular modem port (if present). Although there are slight differences in the way Web interface and text interface networks are organized, both interfaces provide access to essentially the same set of network parameters (with a few exceptions).

Since the network configuration menus must allow the setting of network parameters for two different IP protocols and up to three different network ports, the parameters have been divided into six different submenus, with each menu serving a specific combination of network port and IP protocol. These six menus are accessed through the network selection menu.

To access the Network Range menu, do the following:

• TextInterface: Type /N* and then press Enter to bring up the network selection menu (see Figure 7.3 below). From the Select Network menu, type the number for the port/protocol you want, and then press Enter.

• WebBrowserInterface: Click the Network Configuration link on the left side of the screen to display the Network Selection menu (see Figure 7.4 below). When the Select Network menu appears, click the port/protocol combination you want. Alternatively, the Network Configuration connection escape menus can be used to select the desired port/protocol.

SELECT NETWORK:

Common parameters shared by network interfaces are listed in the ETH0-COMMON Parameters menu. Network parameters specific to an interface are listed below each interface option:

COMMON PARAMETERS:1. eth0

IPv4: IPv6:2. eth1 4.eth03. cell 5. eth1 6th cell

Enter: #to change,to finish...

Figure 7.3: NetworkSelectionMenu(TextInterface)

Figure 7.4: NetworkSelectionMenu(WebInterface)

7-46

setting options

The Network Selection menu provides access to six Network Configuration submenus:

• PortEth0,IPv4Protocol (plus shared parameters)

• PortEth1,IPv4Protocol (Only available on devices that have the dual Ethernet option.)

• CellPort, IPv4Protocol (Only available on devices with cellular modem option.)

• PortEth0, IPv6 Protocol

• PortEth1,IPv6Protocol (Only available on devices that have the dual Ethernet option.)

• CellPort, IPv6Protocol (Only present on devices that have the cellular modem option. See Section 7.8.1.1 for a description of the cellular modem configuration options.)

Note that the DSM/CPM network configuration menus are used to specify parameters that are shared by all DSM/CPM ports/protocols as well as parameters specific to a single port or protocol. Since most of these shared parameters are gathered in the Eth0/IPv4 submenu, when setting network parameters, it is recommended that you first set the parameters found in the Shared (Eth0, IPv4) submenu and then proceed to the appropriate submenu to set other parameters.

Note: Each of the submenus accessible from the network configuration menus contains a header that indicates whether the parameters set in those menus apply to all DSM/CPM network ports and IP protocols, only to all network ports or only for all IP ports - Protocols are shared.

7-47

setting options

7.8.1. network parameters

Note: The settings for the following parameters set from the Network Parameters (Web Interface) and Network Parameters (Text Interface) menus are also applied to the USB mini format setting port: Admin Mode, Disconnect Character, Sequence Separation, Idle Accept Timeout, command echo and pause.

• IP Address: The IP address for the primary Ethernet port, Eth0. (Default settings: IPv4 = 192.168.168.168; IPv6 = unspecified)

Notes: • If required, a separate IP address can be set for each Ethernet port, and IPv4 and IPv6 format IP addresses can be set for each port.

• The IP address cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change the IP address, you must access DSM/CPM via the text interface.

• SubnetMask: (Nur IPv4; Standard = 255.255.255.0)

Notes: • If required, a separate subnet mask can be set for each Ethernet port.

• The subnet mask cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change the subnet mask, you must access DSM/CPM via the text interface.

• SubnetPrefix: (IPv6 only, default = undefined)

Note: If required, a separate subnet prefix can be defined for each Ethernet port.

• Gateway Address: (Default = unspecified)

Notes: If required, a separate gateway address can be set for each Ethernet port and each IP protocol.

• The gateway address cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change the gateway address, you must access DSM/CPM via the text interface.

7-48

setting options

• DHCP: Enables/disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM will perform a DHCP request. Note that in the text interface, the MAC address is displayed on the network status screen. (Default = Off)

Notes: • If required, a separate DHCP configuration can be set for each Ethernet port and cellular port, and IPv4 and IPv6 format IP addresses can be set for each port.

• Before configuring this feature, ensure that your DHCP server can assign a known, static IP address. You will need this new IP address to establish a network connection with DSM/CPM.

• DHCP status cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change the DHCP status, you must access the DSM/CPM via the text interface.

• IPTables: This parameter can be used to restrict network access to DSM/CPM command mode as described in Section 7.8.1.2. (Default = Off)

• StaticRoute: Provides access to a submenu used to enable and set static route attributes as described in Section 7.8.2. (Default = Off)

• DNSServices: Provides access to a submenu used to define DNS services and DDNS services, as described in Section 7.8.3. (default = undefined)

• Negotiation: This parameter can be used to resolve synchronization issues when the DSM/CPM module is negotiating communication parameters with another device. (Default = Auto)

Notes: • If the other device is set to auto-negotiate, the DSM/CPM negotiation parameter should also be set to auto.

• If the other device is not configured to auto-negotiate, the DSM/CPM negotiation parameters should be set to match the other device (eg "100/Full").

• Alternate Modes (units with two Ethernet ports only): Enables/disables alternate Ethernet modes. When this option is enabled, DSM/CPM devices that have the optional secondary Ethernet port will automatically switch to the other Ethernet port when the device detects that the Ethernet port in use cannot establish a network connection. Note that when the fallback is enabled, both Ethernet port 0 and Ethernet port 1 have the same IP address. (Default = Off)

Notes: • When the fallback is enabled, the same MAC addresses are assigned to each DSM/CPMEthernet port. When the fallback is enabled, the two DSM/CPMEthernet ports are connected and share the common parameters of the Ethernet0 port.

• After fallback causes the DSM/CPM to switch to the other Ethernet port, the DSM/CPM does not return to the original Ethernet port after the connection is restored. For example, if a network failure on port ethernet0 causes the device to switch to port ethernet1, the device will not automatically switch back to port ethernet0 after network connectivity is restored.

7-49

setting options

• AdministratorMode: Allows/denies port access to accounts that allow administrator-level commands. If this option is enabled (Allow), the port is allowed to invoke admin-level commands as long as they are issued by an account that allows them. When disabled (deny), accounts that allow commands at the administrator level are not allowed to access the commands function through this port. (Default = Allow)

Note: The setting for the Administrator Mode parameter is also applied to the USB mini format setting port.

• LogoffCharacter: Specifies the logoff character for the network port. This specifies which commands must be issued to this port to disconnect from a second port. (Default = ^X ([Ctrl] plus [X]))

Notes: • The SequenceDisconnect parameter can be used to select a character

a three-digit logout sequence.

• The setting for the "Logoff Character" parameter is also applied to the USB Miniformat setting port.

• SequenceDisconnect: Enables/disables and configures the Resident Disconnect command. It provides the option to either disable sequence splitting or select a one or three character command format. (Default = one character).

Notes:• The OneCharacterDisconnect function is intended for situations where the

The destination port must not receive the disconnect command. If the three-character format is selected, the disconnect sequence is forwarded to the destination port before the connection is terminated.

• If the three-character format is selected, the permanent delimiter uses the format "[Enter]LLL[Enter]" with the selected disconnect character listed.

• The setting for the "SequenceDisconnect" parameter is also applied to the USB mini format setting port.

• Idle Timeout: Enables and selects the idle timeout period of the network port. If this option is enabled and the port does not receive or transmit data for the specified time, the port will disconnect. (Default = 5 minutes)

Note: The setting for the idle timeout parameter also applies to the USB mini format setting port.

• CommandEcho: Enables or disables command echo for the network port. (Default = On).

Note: The setting for the Command Echo parameter also applies to the USB Miniformat configuration port.

7-50

setting options

• AcceptBreak: Defines how the port handles interrupts received from the connected device. When disabled, all interrupt codes are ignored and forwarded to the serial port unchanged. When this option is enabled, ASCII 28 and/or IETF/RFC4335 SSH interrupt sequences are removed and an interrupt sequence is initiated on the connected serial port. (Default = On)

Note: The setting for the "Accept Break" parameter also applies to the USB Miniformat setting port.

• TelnetAccess: Enables/disables Telnet access. When Telnet Access is set to Disabled, users are not allowed to telnet to the device or initiate outgoing telnet connections. (Default = On)

Note: In the text interface, under the Telnet Access submenu, you can select the Telnet port and set the Max Per Source value. In the web browser interface, these parameters are set through the menu "Shared network parameters".

• TelnetPort: Selects the TCP/IP port number used for Telnet connections. (Default = 23)

Note: In the text interface, the Telnet port number is set via a submenu that appears when the Telnet Access parameter is selected. In the web browser interface, the Telnet port parameter is configured through the Common Network Parameters menu.

• Max.PerSource: The maximum number of sessions allowed per user MAC address. (Default = 4)

Notes: • In the text interface, the “Max.

• After changing the MaxPerSource parameter, you must log out of existing sessions for the new maximum value to take effect.

• SSHAccess: Enables/disables SSH communication. (Default = On)

Note: In the text interface, you can select the SSH port and other parameters in the "SSH Access" submenu. In the web browser interface, some of these parameters are set through the Common Network Parameters menu.

• SSHPort: The TCP/IP port number used for SSH connections. (Default = 22)

Note: In the text interface, the SSH port is set via a submenu that appears when the SSH access parameter is selected. In the web browser interface, the SSH port parameter is set via the Common Network Parameters menu.

7-51

setting options

• SSHSecurityLevel: (Text interface only) Sets the SSH security level to either Normal or High. (Default = Normal.)

Notes: • In the text interface, the SSHS security level is set via a submenu that appears when the SSH Access parameter is selected.

• The SSHSecurityLevel parameter is not available through the web browser interface.

• SSHViewPortEnable: (Text interface only) Allows you to monitor serial port activity. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, the SSH View Port Enable parameter is set via a submenu that appears when the SSH Access parameter is selected.

• The SSHViewPortEnable parameter is not available through the web browser interface.

• SSHViewPortBidirection: (Text interface only) Allows you to monitor bidirectional serial port activity. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, the SSH View Port Bidirection parameter is set through a submenu that appears when the SSH Access parameter is selected.

• The SSHViewPortBidirection parameter is not available through the web browser interface.

• WebAccess (HTTPAccess): Enables/disables the web browser interface. If this option is disabled, users are not allowed to communicate with the device through the web browser interface. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, additional WebAccess configuration parameters are accessible through a submenu that appears when the WebAccess parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the WebAccess parameters are accessible through the WebAccess menu.

• If the WebAccess parameter is accessed through the text interface, you can also select SSL/TLS (encryption) parameters from the submenu that appears, as described in Section 15.

• HTTPPort: Selects the TCP/IP port number used for HTTP connections. (Default = 80)

Notes: • In the text interface, the HTTP Port parameter is accessible through a submenu that appears when the Web Access parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the HTTP port parameter is accessible through the Web Access menu.

7-52

setting options

• HTTPSAccess: Enables/disables HTTPS communication. See Section 15 for instructions on setting up SSL/TSL encryption. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, the HTTPS access parameter is accessible through a sub-menu that appears when the web access parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the HTTPS access parameter is accessible through the Web Access menu.

• HTTPSPort: Selects the TCP/IP port number used for HTTPS connections. (Default = 443)

Notes: • In the text interface, the HTTPS Port parameter is accessible through a submenu that appears when the Web Access parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the HTTPS Port parameter is accessible through the Web Access menu.

• HardenWebSecurity: Offers three different web security settings as described below:

Off: All SSL protocols are enabled. (Enables compatibility with older browsers.)

Medium: Only SSLv3/TLS1.x protocols and MEDIUM/HIGH ciphers are enabled. (Predefined)

High: Only TLS1.x protocol and HIGH ciphers are enabled.

Notes: • In the text interface, the Harden Web Security parameter is accessible through a submenu that appears when the Web Access parameter is selected.

• In the WebBrowser interface, the HardenWebSecurity parameter is accessible through the WebAccess menu.

• TLSMode: Selects the TLS version used. With this parameter either only TLSv1, TLSv1.1 and TLSv1.2 or only TSLv1.2 can be selected. See Section 15.4 for more information. (Default = TLSv1.1/TLSv1.2)

Notes: • In the text interface, the TLS mode parameter is accessible through a sub-menu that appears when the web access parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the TLS Mode parameter is accessible via the WebAccess menu.

• TraceMethod: Enables/disables the web trace method. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, the Trace Method parameter is accessible through a submenu that appears when the Web Access parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the Trace Method parameter is accessible via the Web Access menu.

7-53

setting options

• SYSLOGAddresses: Specifies the IP addresses for the syslog daemons that will receive log entries generated by DSM/CPM. Allows IP addresses to be specified for both a primary syslog daemon and an optional secondary syslog daemon. SYSLOG addresses can be entered in IPv4 or IPv6 format, or in domain name format (up to 64 characters). See Section 12 for more information. (Default = undefined)

Notes: • The Syslog Address sub-menu in the text interface and the web browser interface contain a ping test function that can be used against user-selected syslog IP addresses to verify that valid IP addresses have been entered. For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

• In addition to the ping test function, the /TEST command in the text interface or the "Test" option in the web browser interface can also be used on the currently specified syslog addresses to ensure that the IP addresses are responding.

• SNMPAccess: Displays a submenu used to configure SNMP access parameters as described in section 7.8.4.

Notes: • In the text interface, SNMP access parameters are accessed through a submenu that appears when SNMP access is selected.

• In the web browser interface, SNMP access parameters are accessed through the SNMP Parameters menu.

• SNMPTrapParameters: Displays a submenu used to set SNMP trap parameters as described in Section 7.8.5.

Notes: • In the text interface, the SNMP traps parameters are accessed through a submenu that appears when the SNMP traps parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the SNMP Traps parameters are accessible through the SNMP Traps menu.

• LDAP: Displays a submenu used to set LDAP parameters as described in Section 7.8.6.

Notes: • In the text interface, the LDAP parameters are accessed through a submenu that appears when the LDAP option is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the LDAP parameters are accessed through the LDAP link in the Shared (Eth0) Parameters menu.

7-54

setting options

• TACACS: Displays a submenu used to configure TACACS parameters as described in section 7.8.7.

• RADIUS: Displays a submenu used to configure RADIUS parameters, as described in Section 7.8.8.

• PingAccess: Configures DSM/CPM's response to ping commands. Ping access can be configured to block all pings, allow all pings, or only accept (restrict) pings from user-specified IP addresses. If the "restricted" option is selected, up to four allowed IP addresses can be defined via the submenu. Note that disabling ping access to the network port does not affect the functionality of the no-access ping alarm. (Default = Allow All)

• MultipleLogins: (Text interface only) If DSM/CPM is installed in an environment that does not include open network communication (only local communication), the Multiple Logins parameter can be used to determine whether multiple users are logged in or cannot communicate at the same time with the device. When this parameter is set to Off, only one user is allowed to communicate with the device at a time. (Default = On)

• Email Messaging: Displays a submenu used to configure email messaging as described in Section 7.8.9.

• OutboundAccess: Enables/disables the ability to make outbound SSH/Telnet connections through the DSM/CPM's network port. When enabled, users connected to one of the serial ports using the DSM/CPM command mode can connect to the network port and then issue the /TELNET and/or /SSH commands to establish an outgoing connection. For example, to make an outgoing telnet connection, first ensure that both the serial port and password/account have this option enabled, and then access command mode via the text interface on a free serial port. At the command line, issue the /TELNET command as described in Section 11.5. (Default = Off)

• OutboundSecureLevel: When Outbound Access is enabled, this parameter is used to determine whether outbound connections are allowed on both the serial port and the network port, or only the serial port. (Default = Serial only.)

Note: In the text interface, the Outbound Secure Level prompt is located in the Outbound Access submenu.

• RawSocketAccess: Enables/disables Raw Socket protocol access to the network port via Direct Connect and selects either port 3001 or port 23 for Raw Socket access. (Default = Off)

7-55

setting options

7.8.1.1. Cellular Modem Configuration Parameters: If the Cellular modem option is present, the Cellular Modem Parameters menu allows you to select configuration parameters to set up cellular communication for the DSM/CPM device. There are several ways to access the Cell Modem Parameters menu:

• TextInterface (CLI): The Cell Modem Parameters menu can be invoked either by typing /p modem and pressing [Enter] or by invoking the /n* command as described in Section 7.8.

Note: In the text interface, the /cell command can be invoked to display the Cell Modem Statistics screen, which can be used to specify two additional parameters related to the cellular modem: the Access Point Name (APN) and the public ip address .

• WebBrowserInterface: The Cell Modem Parameters menu can be activated via the Network Configuration link, as described in section 7.8.

Note: In the text interface, the /cell command can be used to access the Cell Modem Statistics screen. The Cell Modem Statistics screen can be used to specify two additional parameters related to the cellular modem: the Access Point Name (APN) and the public IP address.

The Cell Modem Parameters menu provides the following configuration options:

• DefaultGateway: Enables/disables the default gateway. (Default = Off)

• DHCP: Enables/disables the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. When this option is enabled, DSM/CPM performs a DHCP request when communicating via cellular. Note that in the text interface, the MAC address is displayed on the network status screen. (Default = Off)

Notes: • Before configuring this feature, ensure that your DHCP server can assign a known, static IP address. You will need this new IP address to establish a network connection with DSM/CPM.

• DHCP status cannot be changed through the web browser interface. To change the DHCP status, you must access the DSM/CPM via the text interface.

• StaticRoute: Provides access to a submenu used to enable and set static route attributes as described in Section 7.8.2. (Default = Off)

• DDNSServices: Provides access to a submenu used to define DNS services and DDNS services as described in Section 7.8.3.2. (default = undefined)

• ModemPPPPparameters: Displays the current PPP parameters of the modem. The modem PPP parameters for the cellular modem port are not user-defined. Instead, they are determined by the network connection.

7-56

setting options

• WebAccess: Enables/disables the web browser interface. If this option is disabled, users cannot communicate with the device through the web browser interface. (Default = Off)

Notes: • In the text interface, additional WebAccess configuration parameters are accessible through a submenu that appears when the WebAccess parameter is selected.

• In the web browser interface, the WebAccess parameters are accessible through the WebAccess menu.

• If the WebAccess parameter is accessed through the text interface, you can also select SSL/TLS (encryption) parameters from the submenu that appears, as described in Section 15.

• SNMPAccess: Displays a submenu used to define SNMP access parameters as described in section 7.8.6.

• PINGAccess: Configures DSM/CPM's response to ping commands on the cellular modem port. Ping access can be configured to block all pings, allow all pings, or only accept (restrict) pings from user-specified IP addresses. If the "restricted" option is selected, up to four allowed IP addresses can be defined via the submenu. Note that disabling ping access to the network port does not affect the functionality of the no-access ping alarm. (Default = Allow All)

7.8.1.2. IP Tables IP tables allow DSM/CPM to prevent unauthorized IP addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 format from making inbound connections to the device. If you want to restrict access to the DSM/CPM module, you can use the IP Tables menu to define a firewall that defines which IP addresses are allowed to access the DSM/CPM command mode and which IP addresses are not. To set up the firewall, proceed as follows:

1. Use the text interface or web browser interface to access the IP Tables menu as described in Section 7.8.

2. When the IP Tables menu appears, use Linux syntax to specify which IP addresses to allow access and which IP addresses to deny. In most cases, IP tables should allow access to administrators and deny access to everyone else.

7.8.2. Static Route The Static Route menu allows you to define Linux routing commands to be executed automatically whenever a user accesses the command mode through the appropriate network port or optional cellular modem port.

7-57

setting options

7.8.3. DNS Services The DNS option is used to configure DNS and DDNS. In the Shared/Eth0 menu, the DNS option is used to access either the DNS Parameters menu or the DDNS Parameters menu.

7.8.3.1. DNS Parameters The DNS Parameters menu is used to select IP addresses in IPv4 or IPv6 format for domain name servers. When entering web and network addresses, the domain name server interprets domain names (eg www.wti.com) and translates them into IP addresses. Note that if you do not specify at least one DNS server, IP addresses must be used instead of domain names. Note that the parameters set by this menu apply to both IPv4 and IPv6 communications.

The Domain Name Servers menu includes a ping test feature that you can use to ping the IP addresses for each custom domain name server to verify that a valid IP address has been entered.

Note: For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

7.8.3.2. DDNS Parameters The DDNS Parameters menu is used to select parameters and specify hosts for dynamic DNS services. The DDNS Parameters menu contains the following parameters:

• Services: This item is used to set the service type to Dyn or None. (Default = None)

• HostName: The IP address for the DDNS service. (default = undefined)

• Username: (Default = undefined)

• Password: (default = unspecified)

• MaximumUpdateTimes: Specifies how often DSM/CPM pings the DDNS host address. (Default = Every 1 hour)

7-58

setting options

7.8.4. SNMP Access Parameters These menus are used to select access parameters for the SNMP function. In the text interface, the SNMP Access Parameters menu is accessible through the Network Configuration menu. In the web browser interface, the SNMP Access Parameters menu can be accessed from the drop-down menus under the Network Configuration link.

Notes: • After configuring SNMP access, you can manage DSM/CPM's user directory, control power and restart, and view device status via SNMP as described in Section 13.

• In the text interface, SNMP access parameters are defined through two separate menus that can be accessed with either the /N (IPv4) or /N6 (IPv6) command.

• In the web browser interface, IPv4 and IPv6 SNMP access parameters are set through a single menu. When setting IPv6 parameters, ensure that the IPv6 check box is selected in the SNMP Access Parameters menu.

The following parameters can be set in the "SNMP Access Parameters" menu:

• Enable: Enables/disables SNMP polling. (Default = Off)

Note: This point only applies to DSM/CPM's external SNMP query. it does not affect DSM/CPM's ability to send SNMP traps.

• Version: This parameter specifies which SNMP version DSM/CPM will respond to. For example, if this item is set to V3, clients attempting to communicate with DSM/CPM via SNMPv2 will not be allowed to connect. (Default = V1/V2 only)

• ReadOnly: Enables/disables "Read Only Mode", which controls access to configuration functions and invocation of switch commands. If this option is enabled, you cannot change configuration parameters or invoke other commands when communicating with DSM/CPM via SNMP. (Default = No)

Note: To set usernames for DSM/CPM via the SNMP client, read-only mode must be disabled. When read-only is enabled, you cannot issue configuration commands to the device via SNMP.

7-59

setting options

• Authentication/Privacy: Configures the authentication and privacy features for SNMPv3 communication. The Authentication/Privacy parameter offers two options that work as follows:

1. Auth/noPriv: Login requires SNMPv3 username and password, but no encryption is used. (Default setting)

2. Auth/Priv: SNMPv3 username and password are required at login and all messages are sent encrypted.

Notes: • Authentication/Privacy is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2.

• If the Version parameter is set to V1/V2/V3 (all) and the Authentication/Privacy parameter is set to Auth/Priv, only V3 data will be encrypted.

• DSM/CPM supports DES encryption but does not currently support the AES protocol.

• DSM/CPM does not support "noAuth/noPriv" for SNMPv3 communication.

• SNMPv3UserName: Specifies the username for SNMPv3. Note that this option is not available if the version parameter is set to V1/V2. (default = undefined)

• SNMPv3Password: Specifies the password for SNMPv3. Note that this option is not available if the version parameter is set to V1/V2. (default = undefined)

• SNMPv3PasswordConfirm: This prompt is used to confirm the SNMPv3 password entered in the question above. Note that this option is not available if the version parameter is set to V1/V2. (default = undefined)

• AuthenticationProtocol: This parameter specifies which authentication protocol is used. DSM/CPM supports MD5 and SHA1 authentication. (Default = MD5)

Notes: • The authentication protocol selected for DSM/CPM must match the protocol used by the SNMP client when querying the DSM/CPM module.

• The Authentication Protocol option is not available when the Version parameter is set to V1/V2

• PrivacyProtocol: (SNMPv3 only) Selects AES or DES encryption support. (Default = DES)

• System Name: (Default = undefined)

• SNMPContact: (Default = undefined)

• SNMPL Location: (Default = undefined)

• ReadOnlyCommunity: Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP version is set to V3. (Default = Public)

• Read/WriteCommunity: Note that this parameter is not available when the SNMP version is set to V3. (Default = Public)

7-60

setting options

7.8.5. SNMP Trap Parameters These menus are used to select parameters used when sending SNMP traps. See Section 13 for more information about SNMP traps. In the SNMP Trap Parameters menu, the following parameters can be set:

• SNMPManagers1to4: The IP addresses for the SNMP managers. See Section 13 for more information. (Default = Undefined)

Note: To enable the SNMPT trap feature, you must define at least one SNMP manager.

• TrapCommunity: (Default = Public)

• TrapVersion: The assigned security level for SNMP traps. (Default = V1)

• V3TrapEngineID: The unique identifier of the V3 SNMP agent. (default = undefined)

• PingTest: Allows you to ping the IP address or domain name specified via SNMP Manager 1 and SNMP Manager 2 messages to verify that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered.

Notes:• For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

• In addition to the ping test function, the /TEST command in the text interface or the "Test" option in the web browser interface can also be used for the currently specified SNMP managers to ensure that the IP addresses are responding.

7-61

setting options

7.8.6. LDAP Parameters DSM/CPM supports Lightweight Directory Access Protocol (LDAP), which allows authentication through the Active Directory network directory service. When LDAP is enabled, new users can be given command access rights without having to define new accounts individually on each DSM/CPM module, and existing users can also be removed without having to delete the account from each DSM/CPM module . This also allows administrators to assign users to LDAP groups and then specify which connectors members of each group are allowed to control in each DSM/CPM entity.

To implement the LDAP feature, you must first set usernames and associated passwords and group memberships through the LDAP server, and then access the DSM/CPM command mode to configure LDAP settings and set port access rights and command access rights for each group in LDAP -Specified server. To access the LDAP Parameters menu, log into DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands.

Notes: • Port and plug access rights are not defined in the LDAP server. They are defined through the LDAP group configuration menu of each DSM/CPM entity and apply only to that DSM/CPM entity.

• If LDAP is enabled, LDAP authentication overrides any passwords and access rights defined through the DSM/CPM user directory.

• If no LDAP groups are defined on a particular DSM/CPM entity, access rights are determined according to the "default" LDAP group.

• The "default" LDAP group cannot be deleted.

The following parameters can be set in the LDAP parameters menu:

• Enable: Enables/disables LDAP authentication. (Default = Off)

• PrimaryHostIPv4: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the primary LDAP server when IPv4 is used to communicate with the DSM/CPM module. (default = undefined)

• PrimaryHostIPv6: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the primary LDAP server when IPv6 is used to communicate with the DSM/CPM module. (default = undefined)

• SecondaryHostIPv4: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the secondary (alternate) LDAP server when using the IPv4 protocol. (default = undefined)

• SecondaryHostIPv6: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the secondary (alternate) LDAP server when using the IPv6 protocol. (default = undefined)

• LDAPport: Specifies the port used to communicate with the LDAP server. (Default = 389)

• TLS/SSL: Enables/disables TLS/SSL encryption. Note that if TLS/SSL encryption is enabled, the LDAP port should be set to 636. (Default = Disable)

• BindType: Specifies the password type for the LDAP bind request. Note that in the text interface, when the binding type is set to "Kerberos" LDAP, the menu contains additional prompts for selecting Kerberos parameters. (Default = Simple)

7-62

setting options

• SearchBindDN: Selects the username that is allowed to search the LDAP directory. (default = undefined)

• SearchBindPassword: Specifies the password for the user allowed to search the LDAP directory. (default = undefined)

• UserSearchBaseDN: Specifies the directory location for user searches. (default = undefined)

• UserSearchFilter: Selects the attribute that lists the username. Note that this attribute should always end with "=%S" (without quotes). (default = undefined)

• GroupMembershipAttribute: Selects the attribute that lists group memberships. (default = undefined)

• GroupMembershipValueType: (Typical = DN)

• Alternate: Enables/disables the LDAP alternate mode. If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM will fall back to its own internal user directory if no specified users are found through the LDAP server. In this case, access rights to the port are then granted as specified in the default LDAP group. (Default = Off)

• KerberosSetup: Kerberos is a network authentication protocol that provides a secure means of authentication for users communicating over an insecure network. In the text interface, Kerberos parameters are selected through a submenu that is only available when Kerberos is selected as the binding type. In the web browser interface, Kerberos parameters are set via the main menu "LDAP Parameters". The following parameters are available:

Port: (Standard = 88)

Range: (Default = Undefined)

KeyDistributionCenters(KDC1bisKDC5): (Default = Undefined)

DomainRealms1through5: (Default = Undefiniert)

• LDAPGroupSetup: Provides access to a submenu used to define LDAP groups as described in Sections 7.8.6.1 through 7.8.6.4.

• Debug: This option is used to assist WTI technical support staff in diagnosing LDAP problems. (Default = Off)

• PingTest: Allows pinging of IP addresses or domain names defined through the LDAP parameter menus to verify that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered.

Notes: • For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

• In addition to the ping test function, the /TEST command in the text interface or the "Test" option in the web browser interface can also be used for each custom IP address to ensure that the IP address is responding.

7-63

setting options

7.8.6.1. Adding LDAP Groups After you have defined multiple users and passwords through the LDAP server and assigned those users to LDAP groups, you must then assign command and port access rights to each LDAP group to each individual DSM/CPM module.

To add LDAP groups to the DSM/CPM module, log into command mode with a password that allows access to administrator-level commands. In the Add LDAP Group menu, the following parameters can be set:

• Group Name: Note that this name must match the LDAP group names you have assigned to users on the LDAP server. (default = undefined)

• AccessLevel: Sets the command access level to Administrator, SuperUser, User, or ViewOnly. See Section 7.3.1 for more information. (Default = User)

• PortAccess: This element is used to select the serial ports that members of this LDAP group are allowed to connect to. (default = undefined)

Note: When configuring a DSM/CPM module that contains an internal dial-up modem, the Port Access parameter is also used to grant or deny users access to the internal modem port. For 8-port DSM/CPM modules, port 9 is the internal modem port. On 24-port DSM units, port 25 is the internal modem port. on 40-port DSM units, port 41 is the internal modem port. The internal function does not include DonDSM/CPM model numbers ending with the suffix "NMI" or "NM".

• PlugAccess: (CPM series devices only) This item is used to determine the plugs that members of this group are allowed to control. (default = undefined)

Note: PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices. The Plug Access and Plug Group Access parameters are not available on DSM series devices.

7-64

setting options

• PlugGroupAccess: (CPM series devices only) This element is used to specify the plug groups that members of this LDAP group are allowed to control. (default = undefined)

• ServiceAccess: Selects access methods for this LDAP group. Specifies whether members of this LDAP group are allowed to access command mode via the serial port, telnet/SSH, web, and/or making outbound connections. Also enables/disables Outbound Telnet. (Default, Serial Port = Enabled, Telnet/SSH = Enabled, Outbound Access = Disabled.)

• Current/Power Metering: (CPM-C series units only) This parameter is used to enable/disable LDAP group access to current and power metering functions. (Default = Off.)

Note: After configuring the LDAP group, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the "Add LDAP Group" button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the message "Save Configuration".

7.8.6.2 View LDAP Groups If you want to examine an existing LDAP group definition, you can use the View LDAP Groups function to examine the group parameters.

7.8.6.3. Modifying LDAP Groups If you want to modify an existing LDAP group to change parameters, you can use the Modify LDAP Group feature to reconfigure the group. To modify an existing LDAP group, access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows access to administrator-level commands. After accessing the Modify LDAP Group menu, use the menu options to redefine the parameters in the same manner used for the Add LDAP Group menu, as described in Section 7.8.6.1.

Note: After changing the LDAP group parameters, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the "Change LDAP Group" button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until DSM/CPM displays the “Save Configuration” message and the cursor returns to the message.

7.8.6.4. Deleting LDAP Groups You can use the Delete LDAP Group feature to delete LDAP groups that are no longer in use. To delete LDAP groups, you must access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows access to administrator-level commands.

7-65

setting options

7.8.7. TACACS Parameters The TACACS configuration menus provide the following options:

• Enable: Enables/disables the TACACS feature on the network port. (Default = Off)

• PrimaryAddress: The IP address or domain name for your primary TACACS server. (default = undefined)

• SecondaryAddress: The IP address or domain name for the secondary alternate TACACS server. (default = undefined)

• SecretWord: The common TACACS secret word for both TACACS servers. (default = undefined)

• FallbackTimer: Specifies how long the device tries to contact the primary TACACS server before falling back to the secondary server. (Default = 15 seconds)

• FallbackLocal: Specifies whether DSM/CPM falls back to its own username directory if an authentication attempt fails. If this option is enabled, the device first tries to check the password by checking the TACACS server. If this fails, the device attempts to authenticate the password by checking its own internal username dictionary. This parameter offers three options:

Disable: Local fallback is disabled (default)

On (All Errors): Local fallback is enabled and the device falls back to the internal user directory when it cannot connect to the TACACS server or when a password or username does not match the TACACS server.

On(TransportFailure): Fallback Local is enabled, but the device only falls back to its own internal user directory if it cannot contact the TACACS server.

• AuthenticationPort: The port number for TACACS mode. (Default = 49)

• DefaultUserAccess: If this option is enabled, TACACS users can access the device without first defining a TACACS user account in DSM/CPM. When new TACACS users gain access to the device, they inherit the default access level, port access, and service access set through the following items: (Default = On)

Enable: Enables/disables the standard user access feature. (Default = On)

AccessLevel: Specifies the default access level setting for new TACACS users. This option allows the default access level for new TACACS users to be set to Administrator, SuperUser, User, or ViewOnly. See Section 7.3.1 and Section 18.2 for more information. (Default = User)

7-66

setting options

PortAccess: Sets the default port access setting for new TACACS users. The Port Access setting determines which serial ports each account can control. (Default settings, Administrator and SuperUser = All ports enabled, User = undefined, ViewOnly = undefined)

Notes: • Administrator and superuser level accounts always have access to all ports.

• User-level accounts only have access to ports specified by the PortAccess parameter.

• The View Only layer can display the connection status of allowed serial ports, but must not establish connections between ports.

PlugAccess: (CPM series devices only) Sets the default Plug Access setting for new TACACS users. (Default settings, Administrator and SuperUser = All sockets enabled, User = undefined, View Only = undefined)

Remarks:

• PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices. The PlugAccess parameter is not available on DSM series devices.

• Administrator and superuser accounts always have access to all plugs.

• User-level accounts only have access to the sockets defined by the Socket Access parameter.

• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the enabled/disabled state of allowed plugs, but are not allowed to invoke toggle and restart commands.

PlugGroupAccess: (CPM series modules only) Sets the default plug group access setting for new TACACS users. See Section 7.5 for more information. (Default settings, Administrator and SuperUser = All Mount Groups Enabled, User = undefined, View Only = undefined)

Notes: • PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices

The Group Access parameter is not available on DSM series devices.

• To be able to use this function, plug groups must first be defined as described in Section 7.5.

• Administrator and superuser level accounts always have access to all plug groups.

• User-level accounts only have access to the socket groups defined via the socket-group access parameter.

• ViewOnly accounts are allowed to view the status of allowed plug groups, but are not allowed to invoke switch and restart commands.

7-67

setting options

ServiceAccess: Selects the default service access setting for new TACACS users. Determines whether each account can access command mode via serial port, telnet/SSH, or web. In addition, the Service Access setting also determines whether each account can use the outbound access feature. (Default = Serial Port = Enabled, Telnet/SSH = Enabled, Web = Enabled, Outbound Access = Disabled.)

Note: If outbound access has been disabled through the Network Parameters menu, the Service Access parameter is not allowed to grant outbound access to new TACACS users.

Current/Power Metering: (CPM-C series units only) Determines whether or not new TACACS users are allowed to access current metering and power metering functions by default. (Default = Off)

• PingTest(PingTACACSServers): Allows pinging of IP addresses or domain names defined through the TACACS parameter menus to verify that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered.

Notes:• For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

7-68

setting options

7.8.8. RADIUS Parameters In the text interface, the RADIUS Parameters menu is accessible from the Network Configuration menu (/N for IPv4 parameters or /N6 for IPv6 parameters). In the web browser interface, both IPv4 and IPv6 parameters are defined through a single RADIUS parameter menu, accessible from the escape menus under the Network Configuration link. The RADIUS configuration menus provide the following options:

• Enable: Enables/disables the RADIUS function on the network port. (Default = Off)

• PrimaryHost: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the primary RADIUS server. (default = undefined)

• PrimarySecretWord: Specifies the RADIUS secret word for the primary RADIUS server. (default = undefined)

• SecondaryHost: Specifies the IP address or domain name for the secondary alternate RADIUS server. (default = undefined)

• SecondarySecretWord: Specifies the RADIUS secret word for the secondary RADIUS server. (default = undefined)

• FallbackTimer: Specifies how long DSM/CPM will keep trying to contact the primary RADIUS server before falling back to the secondary RADIUS server. (Default = 3 seconds)

• FallbackLocal: Specifies whether DSM/CPM falls back to its own password/username directory if an authentication attempt fails. If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM first tries to check the password by checking the RADIUS server. If this fails, DSM/CPM attempts to authenticate the password by checking its own internal username dictionary. This parameter offers three options:

Off: Local fallback is disabled (default setting).

On (All Errors): Local fallback is enabled and the device falls back to the internal user directory when it cannot connect to the Radius server or when a password or username does not match the Radius server.

On(TransportFailure): Fallback Local is enabled, but the device only falls back to its own internal user directory if it cannot connect to the Radius server.

• Retry: Specifies how often DSM/CPM tries to contact the RADIUS server. Note that the apply retry parameter applies to both the primary RADIUS server and the secondary RADIUS server. (Default = 3)

• AuthenticationPort—The authentication port number for the RADIUS feature. (Default = 1812)

7-69

setting options

• AccountingPort: The accounting port number for RADIUS mode. (Default = 1813)

• Debug: (Text interface only) If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM logs RADIUS debugging information to the logging system. (Default = Off)

• OneTimeAuth: This feature should be enabled when using two-factor authentication with OTP enabled. If this option is enabled, the one-time password is valid for the time specified in the OneTime Auth Timer parameter. (Default = Off)

• OneTimeAuthTimer: If the OneTime Auth parameter is enabled, this parameter specifies how long (in minutes) the one-time password is valid. (Default = 5 minutes)

• PingTest(PingRADIUSServers): Allows pinging of IP addresses or domain names defined through the RADIUS configuration menus to verify that a valid IP address or domain name has been entered.

Notes:• For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

7.8.8.1. Dictionary Support for RADIUS The RADIUS dictionary file allows you to define a user and assign command permissions and port permissions from a central location.

The RADIUS dictionary file "dictionary.wti" can be found under the Downloads tab on the wti.com product information page. For information about installing the dictionary file on the RADIUS server, see your server's documentation. Some servers require the dictionary file to be in a specific directory location, while others require the dictionary file to be appended to an existing RADIUS dictionary file.

The WTI RADIUS dictionary file provides the following commands:

• WTI-Super - Sets the command access level for the user. This command provides the following arguments: 0 = ViewOnly 1 = User 2 = SuperUser 3 = Administrator

For example, to set the command access level to SuperUser, the command line would look like this:

WTI-Super="2"

7-70

setting options

• WTI-Port-Access - Specifies which ports the user is allowed to access. This command provides an argument consisting of an 8-digit string, with one character for each DSM/CPM serial port. The following options are available for each port: 0 = Disable (deny access) 1 = Enable (allow access)

For example, to allow access to serial ports 1, 2, 3, 5, and 8, the command line would be:

WTI-Port-Access="11101001"

• WTI-Plug-Access – (CPM series devices only) Defines which plugs the user is allowed to access. This command provides an argument consisting of a four-digit string, with one character for each switch output of the DSM/CPM. The following options are available for each toggle connector: 0 = Disable (deny access) 1 = Enable (allow access)

For example, to allow access to pins 2 and 4, the command line would be:

WTI-Plug-Access="0101"

Note: PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices. PowerControl parameters are not available on DSM series devices.

• WTI-Group-Access – (CPM series devices only) Defines which connection groups the user is allowed to access. The argument to this command includes one character for each connector group defined, using the first character in the string to represent the first connection group defined and the last character in the string to represent the last connection group defined. The following options are available for each connector group: 0 = Disable (deny access) 1 = Enable (allow access)

For example, to allow access to the first three specified connector groups out of a total of six specified connector groups, the command line would look like this:

WTI-Group-Access="111000"

Note: PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices. PowerControl parameters are not available on DSM series devices.

Example: The following command could be used to set the command access level to "User" and allow access to serial ports 1, 3, 5, and 7:

tom Auth-Type:=Local, User-Password=="tom1" Login-Service=Telnet, Login-TCP-Port=Telnet, User-Name="HARRY-tom", WTI-Super="1", WTI- Port-Access="10101010",

7-71

setting options

7.8.9. Email Message Settings: The Email Messages menu is used to configure email messages that DSM/CPM can send to notify you when an alarm is triggered. The Email Configuration menu provides the following options:

• Enable: Enables/disables the email messaging feature. If disabled, DSM/CPM cannot send email messages when an alert is generated. (Default = Off)

• SMTPServer: This prompt is used to specify the SMTP email server address. (default = undefined)

• PortNumber: Selects the TCP/IP port number used for email connections. (Default = 25)

• Domain: The domain name for your email server. (default = undefined)

Note: Before you can use domain names, you must first configure the domain name server as described in section 7.8.3.

• Username: The username you entered when logging in to your email server. (default = undefined)

• Password: The password used when logging in to your email server. (default = undefined)

• AuthType: The authentication type. DSM/CPM allows you to select None, Basic, Login or CRAM-MD5 Authentication. (Default = None)

• FromName: The name that appears in the From field in emails sent by DSM/CPM. (default = undefined)

• FromAddress: The email address that will appear in the From field in emails sent by DSM/CPM. (default = undefined)

• ToAddress: The addresses that will receive email messages generated by DSM/CPM. Note that up to three "To" addresses can be set and that when you select the alarm configuration parameters as described in Section 9, you can set these addresses as recipients for email messages generated by the alarms. (default = undefined)

• SendTestEmail: Sends a test email using the parameters currently set for the email configuration menu.

7-72

setting options

7.9. Save parameters selected by the user

It is strongly recommended that you save all custom parameters to a file as described in Section 16. This allows for quick recovery in the event of accidental deletion or reconfiguration of the port parameters.

When changing configuration parameters via the text interface, ensure that DSM/CPM has saved the newly set parameters before exiting command mode. To save the settings, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until you exit all configuration menus and DSM/CPM displays the Save Configuration menu and the cursor returns to the prompt. If the newly defined configuration parameters are not saved before exiting command mode, DSM/CPM will revert to the previously saved configuration after exiting command mode.

7.9.1. Resetting a Configuration If you make a mistake while configuring the DSM/CPM module and want to restore the previously saved parameters, the Reboot System (/I) command of the text interface provides the ability to restart the module with previously saved parameters. This allows you to restore the device to previously saved parameters, even after you have changed and saved the parameters.

Notes: • DSM/CPM automatically backs up saved parameters one day, just after midnight. This configuration backup file contains only the last saved DSM/CPM parameters and will be overwritten by the following night's daily backup.

• When the /I command is invoked, a submenu is displayed that offers several reboot options. Option 4 is used to restore the configuration backup file. The dates displayed next to option 4 indicate the date the device settings were last changed and saved.

• If the daily automatic configuration backup has been enabled since the configuration error occurred and the previously saved configuration has been overwritten by newer, incorrect parameters, this function will not be able to restore the previously saved (correct) parameters.

To restore a previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:

1. Access the command shift via the text interface using a username/password that allows access to admin-level commands.

2. At the command prompt, type /I and press Enter. DSM/CPM will display a submenu offering various restart options.

3. In the sub-menu you can either select point 4 (reboot and restore last known working configuration). Type 4 and then press Enter.

4. The DSM/CPM will reboot and the previously saved parameters will be restored.

8-1

8. Restart options

In addition to performing reboot cycles in response to commands, CPM Series devices can also be configured to automatically reboot sockets when a connected device does not respond to a ping command (ping-no-answer reboot) or after a Scheduled defined by the user. restart.)

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. Power-off and reboot functions are not supported on DSM series devices.

• Ping-No-AnswerReboot: When Ping-No-Answer is enabled, CPM Series devices periodically ping a user-selected IP address. If the IP address does not respond to the ping command, the CPM series device will reboot one or more user-selected sockets. Typically, this feature is used to reboot devices when they stop responding to ping.

• Scheduled Restart: A scheduled restart is used to start a restart cycle at a user-selected time and day of the week. When properly configured and activated, CPM series devices will reset one or more outlets on a daily or weekly basis. The scheduled restart feature can also be used to disable outlets at a user-selected time and then re-enable them at a later user-selected time.

This section provides the procedure for configuring and enabling pingless and scheduled restarts.

Note: When setting parameters through the text interface, be sure to press the [Esc] key several times to completely exit the configuration menus and save the newly set parameters. When parameters are set via the text interface, the newly set parameters are not saved until the Save Configuration message appears.

8-2

restart options

8.1. Ping no response Reboot

A no-reply ping restart can be used to restart one or more outputs when a connected device does not respond to a ping command. In addition, the no-reply ping restart feature can also be configured to send an email, syslog message, or SNMP trap to alert you when a no-reply ping restart occurs. For instructions on setting up email notification notification for reboots without a ping response, see Section 9.4.

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. Power-off and reboot functions are not supported on DSM series devices.

To set up a reboot without a ping response, you must access command mode with a password, which allows admin-level commands. In the text interface, the Ping No Answer configuration menu is accessible via the Reboot Options (/RB) menu. In the web browser interface, the Ping No Answer configuration menu is accessible via the Restart Options link. The ping no answer configuration menu can be used to add, modify, view or delete ping no answer restart functions.

Note: For the Ping No Answer restart feature to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the device at the destination IP address must be configured to allow pings.

8.1.1. Add Ping No Answer Restarts Up to 54 ping no answer restarts can be set. The Add Ping No Answer menu is used to set the following parameters for each new Ping No Answer restart:

• IPaddressorDomainName: The IP address or domain name of the device you want to ping. If the device at this address does not respond to the ping command, the CPM series device reboots the selected sockets. (default = undefined)

Notes:• To use domain names, the DNS server parameters must first be specified as described in Section 7.8.3.

• A sub-menu is displayed in the text interface, which allows the user to choose between IPv4 protocol and IPv6 color protocol.

• In the web browser interface, the Protocol parameter in the Add Restart Ping-No-Answer menu is used to select the IPv4 protocol in the color IPv6 protocol.

• Protocol: (web interface only) Allows you to set an IP address in IPv4 format or an IP address in IPv6 format. Note that IPv4 and IPv6 format IP address can be set if required. (Default = IPv4)

• PingInterval: Defines how often the ping command is sent to the selected IP address. The ping interval can be any integer between 1 and 3600 seconds. (Default = 60 seconds)

Note: If the ping interval is set to less than 20 seconds, it is recommended that you set the IP address or domain name parameter to an IP address rather than a domain name. This ensures more reliable results in case the domain name server is unavailable.

8-3

restart options

• IntervalAfterFailedPing: Specifies how often the ping command is sent after a previous ping command has not received a response. (Default = 10 seconds)

• PingDelayAfterPNAAction: Specifies how long the CPM series device waits for more pings to be sent after a no-response ping restart is initiated. Typically, this option is used to give a device time to fully "wake up" after an unresponsive reboot before attempting to ping the device again. (Default = 15 minutes)

• Consecutive Failures: Specifies how many consecutive ping failures must be detected in order to initiate a restart without a ping response. For example, if this value is set to 3, a no-response ping restart is performed after three consecutive ping failures. (Default = 5)

• Restart: Enables/disables the Ping No Answer restart feature for the specified IP address. If this item is disabled, the CPM series device will not restart the specified sockets when no ping response is detected. However, CPM Series devices will still alert you via email, syslog message, and/or SNMP trap, provided the parameters for these functions are set as described in section 7.8 and the ping no response alarm as described in Section 9.4. (Default = No)

Notes:• For email/SMS notification to work, you must first set the email/SMS parameters as described in Section 7.8.9.

• For syslog message notification to work, you must first set a syslog address as described in Section 7.8.1.

• For SNMPTrapNotification to work, you must first set the SNMP parameters as described in Section 7.8.5.

• PNAAction: Defines how CPM series devices react when the IP address does not respond to a ping. CPM series devices can either continuously restart the specified sockets and send notifications until the IP address responds and the restart is cleared without a ping response (continuous alarm/reboot), or restart the specified sockets and only send notifications once time each time the ping with no response initially triggers the reboot (an alarm/reboot). (Default = Continuous Alert/Restart)

• PlugAccess: Specifies which sockets will be restarted if this IP address does not respond to a ping command for this Ping No Answer function. Note that in the text interface, plug access is defined via a separate submenu. In the web browser interface, plug-in access is defined via a drop-down menu accessed by clicking the plus sign in the Plug-in Access Configuration field. (default = undefined)

• PlugGroupAccess: Specifies which plug groups the restart no response ping applies to for this IP address. Note that in the text interface, access to the plug group is defined through a separate submenu. In the web browser interface, plug group access is defined via a drop-down menu accessed by clicking the plus sign. (default = undefined)

8-4

restart options

• PingTest: Sends a test ping command to the IP address or domain name set for this restart without a ping response.

Notes: • For the ping test feature to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the device at the destination IP address must be configured to allow pings.

• After setting or editing the Ping No Answer Reboot parameters, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the Add No Response Ping button to save the parameters. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until the CPM series unit displays the message "Save Configuration" and the cursor returns to the prompt.

8.1.2. View Ping No-Answer Restart Profiles After you have defined one or more Ping No-Answer restart profiles, you can use the View Ping No-Answer feature to review the parameters selected for each profile. To view the configuration of an existing Ping No-Answer profile, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows administrator-level commands, and then use the Ping No-Answer View/Modify Ping No- Answer - Use menu.

8.1.3. Modify Ping No-Answer Profile Restart After you define a no-ping-answer profile, you can use the Modify Ping No-Answer feature to change the configuration of the profile. To change the configuration of an existing Ping No Answer profile, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows administrative-level commands, and then select the Ping No Answer option in the Ping No Answer menu, use display/change. Mode.

CPM Series devices display a screen that allows you to modify the parameters for the selected Ping No Answer restart profile. Note that this screen works identically to the "Add No Response Ping" Restart menu as described in Section 8.1.1.

Note: After setting or editing the Ping No Answer Reboot parameters, be sure to save your changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the Change Ping No Answer button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until the CPM series unit displays the message "Save Configuration" and the cursor returns to the prompt.

8.1.4. Delete Ping No-Answer Profile Restart After you have defined one or more Ping No-Answer profiles, you can delete profiles that are no longer needed using the Delete Ping No-Answer feature. To delete an existing Ping No Answer profile, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows admin-level commands, and then use the Delete Ping No Answer feature in the Ping No Answer menu.

8-5

restart options

8.2. Scheduled reboot

With the Scheduled Restart feature, you can restart one or more sockets or automatically recycle sockets on a user-defined schedule. To configure a scheduled restart, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows access to administrator-level commands.

Note: Power-off and restart functions are only available on CPM series devices. Power-off and reboot functions are not supported on DSM series devices.

In the text interface, the Scheduled Reboot configuration menu can be accessed from the Reboot Options (/RB) menu. In the web browser interface, you can access the Scheduled Restart configuration menu via the Restart Options link. The Scheduled Restart configuration menu can be used to add, modify, view, or delete scheduled restart features.

Note: After setting or editing the parameters for the scheduled restart, be sure to save the changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the Add scheduled restart button to save the settings. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until the CPMSeries unit displays the “Save Configuration” message and the cursor returns to the message.

8.2.1. Adding scheduled restarts allows CPM Series units to set up to 54 scheduled restarts. In the Add scheduled restart menu you can set the following parameters for each new scheduled restart.

• ScheduledRebootName: Assigns a name to this scheduled reboot. (default = undefined)

• PlugAction: Specifies whether the scheduled reboot will cause the plug to be disabled or recycled (rebooted). Note that if you select Disable, Day On and Time are disabled. The Enable option allows you to select the time and day the outlets will be enabled again. (default = off)

• Time: Specifies the time of day when this scheduled restart occurs. (Default = 12:00)

• DayAccess: This prompt provides access to a submenu used to specify the days of the week that this scheduled restart occurs. The Daily Access parameter can also be used to schedule a daily restart. To schedule a daily restart, use the Daily Access submenu to select each day of the week. (default = undefined)

Note: If you want to program a CPM series device to turn an outlet on once and then turn it off at a different time, you must define two separate scheduled actions. The first action is to open the outlet and the second action is to close the outlet.

8-6

restart options

• PlugAccess: Defines which sockets this scheduled reboot action applies to. In the text interface, type the number for Plug Access, press Enter, and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu. In the web browser interface, sockets are specified by clicking the plus sign in the Access Connection field and then selecting the desired sockets from the drop-down menu. (default = undefined)

• PlugGroupAccess: Specifies which plug groups this scheduled reboot action applies to. Note that in the text interface, access to the plug group is defined through a separate submenu. In the web browser interface, plug group access is defined via a drop-down menu accessed by clicking the plus sign in the Add Group Access field. (default = undefined)

8.2.2. View Scheduled Restart Actions After you have defined one or more scheduled restarts, you can review the parameters selected for each restart using the View Scheduled Restarts feature. To view the configuration of an existing scheduled restart, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows admin-level commands, and then use the View/Modify Scheduled Restart feature of the Scheduled Restart menu. The CPM Series device displays a screen with all defined parameters for the selected scheduled restart action.

8.2.3. Modify Scheduled Restarts After you define a scheduled restart, you can edit the configuration of the restart action using the Modify Scheduled Restart feature. To change the configuration of an existing scheduled restart action, you must access the Command mode with a password, which allows administrator-level commands, and then use the View/Modify Scheduled Restart feature of the Scheduled Restart menu.

The CPM Series device displays a screen that allows you to change the parameters for the selected Scheduled Restart action. Note that this screen works identically to the Add Scheduled Restart menu as described in Section 8.2.1.

8.2.4. Deleting Scheduled Restarts After you have defined one or more scheduled restart actions, you can use the Delete Scheduled Restarts feature to delete restart actions that are no longer needed. To delete an existing scheduled restart, go into Command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands, and then use the Delete Scheduled Restart feature in the Scheduled Restart menu.

9-1

9. Alarm configuration

When properly configured, DSM/CPM can monitor temperature readings, ping responses, and various other factors at network installation sites and record this information for future review. When a monitored condition exceeds user-defined trigger levels, DSM/CPM can also alert support personnel via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap. In addition to the monitoring and alerting capabilities offered by standard DSM/CPM Series devices, CPM-C Series devices can also measure and record current, power, and voltage conditions at each outlet.

Notes: • Current functions and performance monitoring functions are only available in CPM-C

series devices.

• To send an alarm notification via email, email addresses and parameters must first be set as described in Section 7.8.11. Alarm notification is then sent via email for all alarms that are enabled as described in this section.

• To send an alarm notification via syslog message, a syslog address must first be defined as described in section 7.8.2. Once the syslog address is set, syslog messages will be sent for each alarm described in this section, provided the alarm's Enable Enable parameter is set to Enable.

• To send an alarm notification via SNMPTrap, the SNMPTrap parameters must first be defined as described in section 7.8.7. After the SNMP Trap parameters are set, SNMP traps will be sent for each alarm described in this section, provided the alarm's Trigger Enable parameter is set to On.

• After setting the parameters through the text interface, make sure to press the [Esc] key several times to completely exit the configuration menu and save the newly set parameters. When parameters are set via the text interface, the newly set parameters are not saved until the Save Configuration message appears.

To configure the alarm functions of DSM/CPM, enter the command mode that allows administrator level with password, and then activate the alarm configuration menu (in the text interface, type /AC and press [Enter], click web browser interface). (see "Configure Alarm" link).

9-2

Alarm configuration

9.1. Overcurrent alarms (CPM-C series only)

Overcurrent alarms are designed to let you know when power consumption meets or exceeds user-defined levels. Depending on the specific CPM-C model, CPM-C units can have up to four overcurrent alarms (two sets of two alarms each):

• The OverCurrentLine alarm (initial) • The OverCurrentLine alarm (critical).

Notes: • Current and performance monitoring functions are not available on DSM series devices

or CPM ranges that do not have the power monitoring option.

• Overcurrent alarms monitor the load on each input line.

Primary alarms are used to provide notification when current consumption reaches a point you may want to investigate, while critical alarms can provide notification when current consumption approaches the maximum allowable value. Trigger levels for initial alarms are generally set lower than trigger levels for critical alarms.

When user-defined activation levels for the current load are exceeded, the CPM-C can automatically turn off power to non-essential devices ("load shedding") to reduce the current load. After load shedding, the CPM-C can also restore power to non-essential equipment if the current load drops to user-defined acceptable levels. See Section 9.1.1 for more information on load shedding.

Notes:• In order for the CPM-C to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be set as described in Section 7.8.11.

• For CPM-C to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 7.8.2 and Section 11.

• For CPM-C to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 6.8.7 and Section 12.

To configure overcurrent alarms, enter command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands, then use the Alarm Configuration menu to select the desired alarm mode.

Note that the configuration menus for both overcurrent alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters, but the parameters set for each alarm are separate. Therefore, the parameters set for a critical alarm do not apply to a first alarm and vice versa.

9-3

Alarm configuration

The Current Alarm Configuration menus provide the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • When an alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• Trigger Enable, Notifyon Clear, Email Message and Address 1, 2 and 3 parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options, which allow you to enable/disable the corresponding parameter for all other alarms. For example, if the Overcurrent Alarm Trigger Enable parameter is set to Enable (Copy to all trigger rules), the triggers for all other DSM/CP alarms will also be enabled.

• AlarmSetThreshold: The trigger level for this alarm. If the current load exceeds the set alarm threshold, the CPM-C can send an alarm and/or initiate load shedding (if enabled). Note that the alarm limit set is entered as a percentage of the maximum capacity and applies to both the overcurrent leg alarm and the overcurrent line alarm (if present) (default settings: Initial = 80%; Critical = 90%)

• AlarmClearThreshold: Defines how low the current load must drop to clear the alarm condition and perform load shedding recovery (if enabled). The net alarm limit is entered as a percentage of the maximum capacity and applies to both the overcurrent leg alarm and the overcurrent line alarm (if present). (Default settings: Initial alerts = 70%, Critical alerts = 80%)

• ResendDelay: How long CPM-C will wait before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification failed. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, CPM-C will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm has been cleared. For example, if notification on deletion is enabled, CPM-C will first send a notification when it detects that the current usage has exceeded the activation value, and then send a second notification when it detects that the current usage has fallen below the trigger the value has fallen. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

• Address1,2 and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined by the Email Messages menu (see Section 7.8.11) will receive the email alarm notifications generated by this alarm. The address parameters allow you to select one or any combination of the addresses defined in the Email Messages menu. (Default = All Enabled)

Note: If email addresses have been previously specified, the text below the parameters lists the current email addresses selected by the user.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by the alarm. (Default settings = "Alarm: Overcurrent (Initial)" or "Alarm: Overcurrent (Critical)")

9-4

Alarm configuration

• Load Shedding: Provides access to a submenu used to configure and enable load shedding for the overcurrent alarm. When load shedding is enabled and properly configured, the CPM-C will enable or disable user-selected plugs when the current load exceeds the specified alarm threshold. If the auto-recovery feature is enabled, the CPM-C can also restore these user-selected plugs to their previous state when the current load drops below the clear alarm threshold. See Section 9.1.1 for more information on load shedding and automatic recovery.

9.1.1. Overcurrent Alarms - Load Shedding and Automatic Recovery The load shedding feature is used to enable or disable specific user-defined non-essential plugs when the current load exceeds the specified alarm threshold. This allows CPM-C to automatically terminate connectors to reduce the current load when the load approaches user-defined critical levels. When the auto-recovery feature is enabled, the CPM-C can also automatically "undo" the effects of the Load Shed feature when the current load drops to a user-defined, non-critical level.

Together, the load shedding and auto-recovery functions allow the CPM-C to turn off power to non-essential devices when the current load is too high, and then turn on the same non-essential devices again when the load drops to an acceptable level.

In the load configuration menus you can set the following parameters:

Notes: • Current functions and performance monitoring functions are only available in CPM-C

series devices.

• The load shedding configuration menus for the overcurrent alarms offer essentially the same set of parameters, but the parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique. For example, parameters set for the overcurrent alarm (initial) do not apply to the overcurrent alarm (critical) and vice versa.

• Enable: Enables/disables load shedding for the corresponding alarm. When enabled, the CPM-C will switch user-specified plugs when the current load exceeds the specified alarm threshold. (Default = Off)

• PlugState: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups are enabled or disabled when load shedding is enabled and the current load exceeds the user-defined alarm threshold. For example, if the plug state is disabled, the plugs or plug groups will be disabled when the specified alarm threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off)

9-5

Alarm configuration

• AutoRecovery: Enables/disables Auto Recovery for the selected branch or line. If both load shedding and auto-recovery are enabled, the CPM-C will reset the plugs to their previous on/off state after the current load drops below the clear alarm threshold. This allows the CPM-C to "undo" the effects of load shedding after the current load has returned to acceptable levels. (Default = Off)

• PlugAccess: Defines which plug is disconnected when the current load exceeds the specified alarm limit and load rejection is activated. For example, if pins A1, A2 and A3 are selected, these pins will be activated or deactivated whenever the current load exceeds the specified alarm threshold. (default = undefined)

• PlugGroupAccess: Specifies which plug groups are changed when load shedding is enabled. For example, if you defined a plug group named "test" that includes plugs B3, B4, and B5, and then used the Plug Group Access parameter to select the plug group "test", all plugs in the plug group " test " The plug group is activated or deactivated whenever the current load exceeds the specified alarm limit. (default = undefined)

Note: Connector pools must first be defined (as described in Section 6.5) before they can be viewed in the Connector Pool Access submenu of the Load Shedding menu.

After you set the parameters for a particular branch or line, you can also set additional parameters for other branches or lines (if any). To set load shedding parameters for other branches or lines, return to the Alarm Configuration menu and then repeat the procedure described in section 9.1.1.

9-6

Alarm configuration

9.2. The overheating alarms

Overtemperature alarms can let you know when your equipment rack temperatures meet or exceed user-defined limits. There are two separate temperature alarms. the initial threshold alarm and the critical threshold alarm.

Typically, the Initial Threshold alarm is used to provide an alert when temperatures reach a point you may want to investigate, while the Critical Threshold alarm is used to provide an alert when temperatures approach a level that could damage equipment or affect performance. The trigger for the Initial Limit alarm is generally set lower than the Critical Limit alarm.

Notes:• In order for DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email,

Communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 7.8.2.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7.

To configure overtemperature alarms, enter DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands, then use the Alarm Configuration menu to select the desired alarm mode.

Note that both the Initial Threshold and Critical Threshold menus offer essentially the same set of parameters, but the parameters set for each alarm are separate and unique. Therefore, the parameters set for the critical threshold alarm are not applied to the original threshold alarm and vice versa. Both the overtemperature alarm (initial limit) and the overheat alarm (critical limit) offer the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • To clear an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• The "Trigger Enable", "Notifyon Clear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include "Copy to All Triggers" options, which allow you to copy the corresponding parameter for all alarms DSM/CP enable disable. For example, if the "Activate Enable" parameter of the "Missed Communications" alarm is set to "Enable (Copy to all activation rules)", all other DSM/CP alarms will also be enabled.

9-7

Alarm configuration

• AlarmSetThreshold: The trigger level for this alarm. When the temperature exceeds the set alarm threshold, the DSM/CPM can send an alarm (if enabled) and/or initiate load shedding (if enabled). See Section 9.2.1 for more information on load shedding. (Initial Limit: Default = 110°F or 43°C, Critical Limit: Default = 120°F or 49°C)

Note: The alarm setting limit must be greater than the alarm clearing limit. DSM/CPM does not allow you to set an alarm clearing threshold that is higher than the alarm set threshold.

• AlarmClearThreshold: Defines how low the temperature must drop to clear the alarm condition and perform automatic recovery (if enabled). See Section 9.2.1 for more information on load shedding and automatic recovery for the overheat alarm. (Initial Limit: Default = 100°F or 38°C, Critical Limit: Default = 110°F or 43°C)

Note: The System Parameters menu is used to set the temperature format for the DSM/CPM to either Fahrenheit or Celsius as described in Section 6.2.

• ResendDelay: Specifies how long DSM/CPM will wait before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send a notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if Alert on Clearing is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial alert when it detects that the temperature has exceeded the trigger level, and then send a second alert when it detects that the temperature has dropped below the activation level . (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

• Address 1, 2 and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined via the Email Messages menu (see Section 7.8.11) will receive the E-Receive notification notifications. The address parameters allow you to select one or any combination of the addresses defined in the Email Messages menu. (Default = All Enabled)

Note: If email addresses have previously been specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: Over Temperature (Initial)" or "Alarm: Over Temperature (Critical)")

9-8

Alarm configuration

• Load Shedding: (CPM series units only) Provides access to a submenu used to configure and enable the load shedding feature for over temperature alarms. When load shedding is enabled and properly configured, CPM Series devices can activate or deactivate specific user-selected plugs when the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold. With auto-recovery enabled, the CPM Series device can also reset these user-selected plugs to their previous state when the temperature drops below the clear alarm threshold. See Section 9.2.1 for more information.

9.2.1. Over temperature alarms - load shedding and automatic recovery

Note: PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices. Load shedding is not available on DSM series devices.

The load shedding feature is used to activate or deactivate specific, user-defined plugs when the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold. This allows a CPM Series unit to automatically turn off unnecessary equipment to reduce the temperature generated in the rack, or to automatically turn on equipment such as fans or cooling systems to dissipate heat from the rack. When the auto-recovery feature is enabled, the CPM Series unit can also automatically "undo" the effects of the load shedding feature when the temperature drops back to a user-defined, non-critical level.

Note: The load shedding configuration menus for Initial Threshold Alarm and Critical Threshold Alarm provide essentially the same set of parameters, however the parameters defined for each alarm are separate and unique. Therefore, the parameters set for critical threshold load shedding are not applied to the original threshold alarm and vice versa.

The Over Temperature Alarm (Initial Limit) and Over Temperature Alarm (Critical Limit) configuration menus of load setting provide the following parameters:

• Enable: Enables/disables load shedding for the corresponding alarm. When enabled, the CPM Series device will switch user-specified plugs when the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold. (Default = Off)

• PlugState: Determines whether the selected plugs/plug groups are enabled or disabled when load shedding is enabled and the temperature exceeds the user-defined alarm threshold. For example, if the plug state is set to "Off", the selected plugs/plug groups will be disabled when the specified alarm threshold is exceeded. (Default = Off)

• AutoRecovery: Enables/disables the Auto Recovery feature. If both load shedding and automatic recovery are enabled, the CPM series device will reset the plugs to their previous on/off state after the temperature drops below the clear alarm threshold. This allows the CPM series unit to "undo" the effects of load shedding once the temperature has returned to an acceptable level. (Default = Off)

9-9

Alarm configuration

• PlugAccess: Defines which plugs are switched when the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold and the load shedding function is activated. For example, if pins 1, 2 and 3 are selected, these pins will be activated or deactivated whenever the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold. (default = undefined)

Notes: • In the text interface, plug access is configured by typing 4, pressing [Enter], and then selecting the desired plug from the resulting sub-menu.

• In the web browser interface, socket access is configured by clicking the plus icon in the Configure Plug Access field to display the drop-down menu, then selecting the desired socket(s). select from the drop-down menu.

• PlugGroupAccess: Defines which plug groups are changed when the temperature exceeds the specified alarm threshold and the load shedding function is activated. For example, if you have defined a plug group named "test" that includes plugs 2, 3, and 4, and then select the plug group "test" via the Plug Group Access parameter, all plugs in the plug group " test" The plug group is activated or deactivated whenever the temperature exceeds the set alarm limit. (default = undefined)

Notes: • PowerControl functions are only available on CPM series devices

The discard function is not available on DSM series devices.

• In the text interface, plug group access is configured by typing 5, pressing [Enter], and then selecting the desired plug groups from the resulting sub-menu.

• In the web browser interface, plug group access is configured by clicking the plus icon in the Configure Plug Group Access field to display the drop-down menu, then selecting the desired plug groups( n) select from the drop-down menu.

• Plugin Pools must first be defined (as described in Section 7.5) to be viewable in the Plugin Pool Access sub-menu of the Load Shedding menu.

9-10

Alarm configuration

9.3. The lost communication alarm

The Communication With Device Lost alarm is designed to provide immediate notification when communication with a connected WTI device is lost. When the loss of communication alarm is triggered, DSM/CPM can provide notification via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap.

Notes:• In order for this alarm to provide email notification, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• In order for this alarm to provide notification via a syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be set and syslog messages enabled as described in section 7.8.2.

• For this notification to provide SNMP trap notification, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7.

• For the loss of communication alarm to work, the Heartbeat parameter must be enabled on the serial port you want to monitor. For example, to monitor a WTI device connected to serial port 3, heartbeat mode must be enabled on serial port 3.

To configure the loss of communication alarm, access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. Enable heartbeat mode and select "Any-to-Any" port mode on the desired serial port as described in Section 7.7.2, then do the following:

Notes: • The Loss of Communication alarm will not work properly if the target serial ports are not configured for any mode or if the heartbeat mode is not enabled on those ports.

• For the loss of communication alarm to work properly, you may need to update the firmware on the remote WTI device.

The configuration menu for the loss of communication alarm offers the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • To clear an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

9-11

Alarm configuration

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if "Notify on Delete" is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial notification when it detects a loss of communication with a WTI device connected to one of the DSM/CPM serial ports, and then send a second notification when when it detects that communication has been restored. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses have previously been specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: Communication with device lost")

9-12

Alarm configuration

9.4. Το Ping No Response Alert

The Ping No Answer notification can be used to provide notification when a device at a destination IP address does not respond to a ping command. When properly configured and enabled, Ping No Answer notification can immediately alert network administrators and support personnel when a target device malfunctions. This enables rapid response to device problems that may affect network communications.

On CPM series devices, the Ping No Answer notification can be used in conjunction with the Ping No Answer Reboot function to automatically reboot target devices that do not respond to ping commands, and additionally provides notification when unresponsive devices are detected. The following sections describe the procedure for setting the Ping No Answer alarm on both CPM Series and DSM Series devices.

9.4.1. Ping Notification on No Response - DSM Series Devices When properly configured, standard DSM Series devices can send a notification when a device at a user-specified IP address does not respond to a ping command. If any of the custom IP addresses do not respond to a ping command, DSM/CPM can provide notification via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap.

Notes:• For instructions on configuring the Ping No Response alarm on CPM Series devices, see Section 9.4.2.

• For the Ping No Response notification to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the device at the destination IP address must be configured to allow pings.

• For this notification to work, at least one destination IP address must be defined for the Ping No Response notification as described in Section 9.4.1.1.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide syslog message notifications, syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled, as described in Section 7.8.2.

• For DSM/CPM to provide an SNMP trap notification when this alarm is triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7.

9-13

Alarm configuration

9.4.1.1. Specifying Non-Ping Response IP Addresses - DSM Series Devices For the non-ping response alarm to work, you must first define at least one destination IP address. To set destination IP addresses for the no-answer alarm, access the command mode using an account that allows administrator-level commands, and then do the following:

• TextInterface: At the command prompt, type /PNA, then press Enter to display the Ping No Answer menu. Type 2 and press Enter to add a destination IP address for the no-answer ping notification.

• WebBrowserInterface: Click the Ping No Answer Configuration link on the left side of the screen to display the Ping No Answer Configuration menu. Click the Add No Ping Alert link to set one or more target IP addresses for the No Ping Alert.

Note that both the text interface and the web browser interface contain menu options that allow you to either view unanswered ping IP addresses, add new no-reply addresses, ping, add no. default ping no response IP addresses IP addresses.

After one or more Ping No Answer IP addresses are defined as described in this section, the Ping No Answer notification feature can be enabled and configured as described in Section 9.4.1.2. Up to 54 pings no reply IP addresses can be set. The Add Ping No-Response menu is used to set the following parameters for each new Ping No-Response IP address:

• IPaddressorDomainName: The IP address or domain name for the target device. If the device at this address does not respond to the ping command, the ping no answer alarm can provide a user notification. (default = undefined)

Notes:• To use domain names, you must first set the DNS parameters as described in Section 7.8.5.

• The destination IP address can be entered in either IPv4 or IPv6 format. In the text interface, either IPv4 or IPv6 is selected via an "IP Address or Domain Name" submenu. In the web browser interface, a drop-down menu is used to select the desired protocol.

• Protocol: Allows you to set an IP address in IPv4 format or an IP address in IPv6 format. Note that IPv4 and IPv6 format IP address can be set if required. (Default = IPv4)

Note: In the text interface, the protocol is specified using the IP address or domain name prompt.

• PingInterval: Defines how often the ping command is sent to the selected IP address. The ping interval can be any integer between 1 and 3600 seconds. (Default = 60 seconds)

9-14

Alarm configuration

• IntervalAfterFailedPing: Specifies how often the ping command is sent after a previous ping command has not received a response. (Default = 10 seconds)

• PingDelayAfterPNAAction: Specifies how long DSM/CPM waits to send more pings after the Ping No Response alarm is triggered. (Default = 15 minutes)

• Consecutive Failures: Specifies how many consecutive ping failures must be detected to trigger the no ping response alarm. For example, if this value is set to 3, the Ping No Response alarm is raised after three consecutive ping failures. (Default = 5)

• PNAAction: Specifies how the Ping No Response alarm is responded to when this IP address does not respond to a ping. If Continuous Alert is selected, DSM/CPM will continue to generate new alerts until the Ping No Response alert is cleared. If "Single Alert" is generated, DSM/CPM will generate a single alert and will not generate further alerts until a successful ping is completed and then another no-response ping condition is detected. (Default = permanent alarm)

• PingTest: Sends a test ping command to this IP address.

Notes:• For the ping test function to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the device at the destination IP address must be configured to allow ping commands.

• After setting or editing PingNoAnswer IP addresses, be sure to save your changes before continuing. In the web browser interface, click the "Add PingNoAnswer" button to save the parameters. In the text interface, press the [Esc] key repeatedly until the "Save Configuration" message appears and the cursor returns to the message.

9-15

Alarm configuration

9.4.1.2. Configuring the Ping No Response Alarm - DSM Series Devices To configure the Ping No Response alarm, you must access the Command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. The Ping No Response Alert configuration menu provides the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes:• For this notification to work, at least one destination IP address must be set for the Ping No Response notification as described in Section 9.4.1.1.

• To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply change the Trigger Enable parameter to Disable, then switch back to Enable.

• The "TriggerEnable", "NotifyonClear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include the "Copy to All Triggers" option, which allows you to copy the corresponding parameter for all DSM/CP Enable/Disable Malarms. For example, if the Enable Ping NoAnswer alarm trigger parameter is set to "On (copy to all trigger rules)", all other DSM/CP alarms will also be triggered.

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if "Notify on Delete" is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial notification when it detects that a ping command has failed, and then send a second notification when it detects that the IP address has returned to the command Ping responds. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Notification: Ping No Response")

9-16

Alarm configuration

9.4.2. Ping No Answer Alert - CPM Series Devices Ping No Answer Alert can send an alert when one of the IP addresses defined through the Ping No Answer Reboot feature (as described in Section 7.1) fails to respond to a ping command. If one of the custom IP addresses does not respond to a ping command, CPM Series devices can send a notification via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap.

Notes:• For instructions on configuring the Ping No Response alarm on DSM Series devices, see Section 9.4.1.

• For the Ping No Response notification to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the devices at the destination IP addresses must be configured to allow pings.

• For this notification to work, IP addresses must first be set for the no-reply restart feature, as described in Section 8.1.

• If you want to use the no ping alarm without generating no ping restarts, make sure the restart parameter in the no ping restart menu is set to No.

• If a Ping No Response condition is detected, CPM Series devices may restart user-selected sockets as described in Section 8.1 and may also send an email, a syslog message, and/or a send trap SNMP, if properly configured as described in this section.

• In order for the CPMSeries device to provide alarm notifications via email, the communication parameters must first be set as described in Section 7.8.11.

• In order for the CPM series module to report syslog messages, the syslog parameters must first be set and syslog messages enabled, as described in section 7.8.2.

• In order for the CPM Series device to provide an SNMP trap notification when this alarm is triggered, SNMP parameters must first be set and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7.

To configure the Ping No Answer notification, you must access the CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. Up to 54 pings no reply IP addresses can be set. The Add Ping No Answer menu is used to set the following parameters for each new Ping No Answer IP address:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply change the Trigger Enable parameter to Off and then back to On.

• The "Trigger Enable", "Notifyon Clear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include the "Copy to All Triggers" option, which allows you to copy the corresponding parameter for all CPs Enable/Disable Malarms. For example, if the Trigger Enable parameter of the Ping NoAnswer alarm is set to "On (copy to all trigger rules)", all other CP alarms will also be triggered.

9-17

Alarm configuration

• ResendDelay: How long the CPM Series device waits to resend an email message generated by this alert if the first attempt to send the alert fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, the CPM Series device will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if Notify When Deleting is enabled, the CPM Series appliance will send an initial notification when it detects that a ping command failed, and then send a second notification when it detects that the IP address has been reassigned, responding in the ping command. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Notification: Ping No Answer")

9-18

Alarm configuration

9.5. Invalid serial port lock access alarm

The Invalid Serial Port Access Lock alarm can provide notification when the DSM/CPM has locked the serial ports due to repeated invalid attempts to access command mode through the serial port. Normally, the Invalid Access Lockout feature (see Section 7.2.2) can lock out serial ports when the device detects that the user-defined invalid access attempt limit has been exceeded. If the serial port invalid access lock alarm is properly configured and enabled, the device can also send a notification via email, SYSLOG message, or SNMP trap when a serial port lock occurs.

Notes: • Note that the Serial Port Invalid Access Lock alarm is only intended to provide notification when the Invalid Access Lock feature has locked the serial ports. To implement the Invalid Access Lockout feature on the network port, see Section 7.2.2.

• For this notification to work, the target ports must be configured in "Any-to-Any" mode and the invalid access blocking parameters for the desired serial ports must first be configured and enabled as described in Section 7.2.2.

• If desired, DSM/CPM can be configured to count invalid serial port access attempts and issue an alert when the number exceeds a user-defined trigger level without actually locking the serial ports. To do this, enable the invalid access lock alarms described here, but if you configure the invalid access lock parameters as described in Section 7.2.2, set the lock attempt, change the lock duration as usual, and then set the Set Activation Lock parameter to Away from.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide syslog message notifications, syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages must be enabled, as described in Section 7.7.2 and Section 12.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide an SNMP trap alert when this alert is triggered, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled, as described in Section 7.8.5 and Section 12.

9-19

Alarm configuration

To configure the Invalid Serial Port Access Lock alarm, you must access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. The configuration menu for the invalid access lockout alarm offers the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note: • When an analog alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• The "TriggerEnable", "NotifyonClear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include the "Copy to All Triggers" option, which allows you to copy the corresponding parameter for all DSM/CP Enable/Disable Malarms. For example, if the Enable Invalid Access Lock alarm trigger parameter is set to On (copy to all trigger rules), then other DSM/CP alarms will also be triggered.

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if "Notify when unlocked" is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial notification when it detects that an invalid access lock has occurred, and then send a second notification when it detects that the ports have been unlocked. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Notification: Invalid access lock")

9-20

Alarm configuration

9.6 Der Power-Cycle-Alarm

The Power Cycle Alarm can issue an alert when all input power to the DSM/CPM module is lost and then restored. When power is lost and then restored, DSM/CPM can provide notification via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap.

Notes:• The PowerCycle alarm can provide notification when all input power to the DSM/CPM device fails and then recovers. This alarm does not work on devices that have dual power input. To provide an alert when only one power input line is broken or disconnected, use the Loss of Power (Line In) alarms described in Section 9.9.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 7.8.2 and Section 12.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7 and Section 12.

To configure the power cycle alarm, you must access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. The Power Cycle Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note: • When an analog alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• The Trigger Enable, Email Message, and Address 1, 2, and 3 parameters all include the Copy to All Trigger Rules option, which allows you to enable the corresponding parameter for all DSM alarms/ CP /can disable. For example, if the Enable PowerCycle Alarm Trigger parameter is set to "On (copy to all trigger rules)", other DSM/CP alarms will also be triggered.

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: Enable/Disable")

9-21

Alarm configuration

9.7. buffer threshold alarm

The buffer threshold alarm can issue an alert when the amount of data buffered for a particular serial port exceeds the buffer limit defined for that port, as described in Section 6.7.2. When the amount of buffered data for a particular serial port exceeds the user-defined buffer limit, DSM/CPM can provide notification via email, syslog message, or SNMP trap.

Notes: • The buffering threshold alarm can only be applied to serial ports configured for buffering as described in Section 6.7.2.

• For the buffering threshold alarm to work, you must first set the buffer limit for each desired serial port, as described in section 7.7.2.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 7.8.2.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 7.8.7.

• If the cache threshold alarm is not enabled, DSM/CPM can send SNMP traps to alert you when the amount of data accumulated on the cache mode port exceeds the storage limit, provided that SNMPT trap parameters such as described in Section 7.8 .7 are defined.

To configure the buffer limit alarm, access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands, then set the port mode for the desired serial port to buffer mode and set the buffer limit storage for the port as described in Section 6.7 .2. The Buffer Threshold Alarm configuration menu offers the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • When an alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• The "TriggerEnable", "NotifyonClear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include the "Copy to All Triggers" option, which allows you to copy the corresponding parameter for all DSM/CP Enable/Disable Malarms. For example, if the Enable Buffer Threshold Alarm Trigger parameter is set to On (copy to all tag rules), then other DSM/CP alarms will also be triggered

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

9-22

Alarm configuration

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if "Notify After Delete" is enabled for the buffer threshold alarm, DSM/CPM will send an initial alert when it detects that the amount of data stored in the buffer for a particular serial port has exceeded the specified by the user threshold buffer. and then send a second notification if the amount of data in the cache is determined to have fallen below the cache limit. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: buffer threshold")

9-23

Alarm configuration

9.8. Plug current alarm (CPM-C series only)

Plug current alarm allows you to monitor the current draw on all switching outputs of the CPM-C and trigger an alarm when the current exceeds a user-defined "High" limit or falls below a user-defined "Low" limit user. The plug power alarm can also be applied to custom plug groups to generate an alarm when the total power consumption for that plug group rises too high or drops too low.

Note: Current and power monitoring functions are not available on DSM series or CPM series devices that do not have the current measurement option.

If desired, the plug power alarm can also be configured to automatically turn off individual plugs or custom groups of plugs when power consumption rises above a user-defined threshold.

To configure the current plug alarm, enter CPM-C command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands, then use the Configure Alarm menu to select the desired alarm mode. The following parameters can be set for the plug current alarm:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note: • When an analog alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• Trigger Enable, Notifyon Clear, Email Message and Address 1, 2 and 3 parameters all include Copy to All Triggers options, which allow you to enable/disable the corresponding parameter for all other alarms. For example, if the Plug Current Alarm Trigger Enable parameter is set to On (Copy to all trigger rules), all other alarms will also be triggered.

• PlugHysteresis: This parameter can be used to prevent the Plug Current Alarm from generating excessive "Alarm" and "Clear" messages when the current consumption fluctuates above the trigger level. Basically, you can use the plug lag parameter on both the low and high threshold to set a margin that the current level must exceed to clear an alarm. (Default = 0.5 amps)

Plug hysteresis example: Suppose the low threshold for output A1 is set to 5 amps, the high threshold to 12 amps, and the plug hysteresis value to 1 amp. When the current is high or low, the CPM-C responds as follows:

• Low Alarm: When the current drops below 5 amps, the CPM-C generates an alarm. The alarm will not go off until the current rises above 6 amps (5 amp low limit + 1 amp lag value = 6 amps).

• High Alarm: If the current rises above 12 amps, the CPM-C will generate an alarm. The alarm will not clear until the current drops below 11 amps. (High threshold 12 amps - hysteresis value 1 amp = 11 amps)

9-24

Alarm configuration

• PlugThresholds: Defines the current consumption values that trigger alarms on each plug. Plug thresholds can be configured to trigger an alarm when power consumption rises above a user-defined "High" value and/or when power consumption falls below a user-defined "Low" value. This allows you to set a "normal" current range for each outlet so that the plug's current alarm goes off whenever the current consumption falls outside this range. (default = undefined)

• PlugGroup Thresholds: Defines the current consumption values that trigger alarms for each user-defined plug group. Thresholds for plug groups can be configured to trigger an alarm when the total power consumption for a specific plug group rises above a user-defined "High" value and/or when the power consumption drops below a "Low" value defined by the user. This allows you to set a 'normal' current range for each plug group so that the plug current alarm is triggered whenever the total current consumption of the plug group falls outside this range. (default = undefined)

Note: To set plug group thresholds, you must first define at least one plug group as described in Section 6.5.

• Plug“Off”LowAlarm: Allows configuration of the “Low” power alarm to suppress activation when a plug is intentionally turned off. When this feature is Enabled, the CPM-C will generate a low alarm when the current drops below the low threshold, even if the current drop is due to a socket being intentionally disabled. When this function is "Off", the CPM-C will not generate a low alarm due to a power drop caused by an outlet being turned off. (Default = On)

Notes: • The "Plug-Off" low alarm function also applies to groups of plugs.

• When the Plug-Off Low Alarm function is enabled (On), the CPM-C will always generate a low current alarm when the current drops below the low limit, even if this caused the current to drop in one or more outlets in the plug group were intentionally disabled.

• When the Plug-Off Low Alarm function is disabled (Off), the CPM-C will not generate a low power alarm if a loss of power is caused by intentionally turning off all outlets in the plug group.

• ResendDelay: How long CPM-C will wait before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification failed. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, CPM-C will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm has been cleared. For example, if "Notify after clearing" is enabled, the CPM-C will send an initial notification when it detects that the current consumption has increased above the set "High" activation value, and then send a second notification when it detects that the current consumption has fallen below the "Low" trigger value. (Default = On)

9-25

Alarm configuration

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: plug current")

• PlugShedding: Enables individual plugs to be automatically turned off or on when the current draw on the plug exceeds a user-defined high plug limit. (default = exit)

Note: To enable plug rejection, you must first set the high plug threshold value for each desired plug.

• PlugGroupShedding: Enables custom pluggroups to be automatically disabled or enabled when the pluggroup power consumption rises above the user-defined high pluggroup threshold. (default = exit)

Note: To enable Plug Group Shedding, you must first set the High Plug Group Limit for each desired Plug Group.

9-26

Alarm configuration

9.9. Loss of Voltage Alarm (Dual Power Input Devices Only)

Power Loss Alarm (AC Input) can provide notification when either of the two power supplies available on a dual power input unit is lost.

Notes:• The Loss of Voltage (Line In) alarm is only available on DSM/CPM devices that have two power inputs. The power loss (Line In) alarm is not available on devices that only have a power input.

• Loss of power (Line In) alarm provides an alert if either of the two available power supplies is lost or disconnected. This alarm will not operate if input power to the device is lost. To alert when all input power is lost or restored, use the power cycle alarms described in Section 9.6.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 7.8.11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 6.8.2 and Section 11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 6.8.7 and Section 12.

To configure the Power Loss (Line Input) alarm, you must access the DSM/CPM command mode with a password that allows administrator-level commands. The Power Loss Alarm configuration menu provides the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note:• To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply disable the Enable Activation parameter and then enable it again.

• The "Trigger Enable", "NotifyUponClear", "Email Message" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include the "Copy to All Triggers" option, which enables the corresponding parameter for all DSM/CP alarms /can disable. For example, if the Loss of Power Alarm Trigger Enable parameter is set to On (Copy to all triggers), then all other DSM/CP alarms will also be enabled.

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

9-27

Alarm configuration

• NotifyUponClear: If this option is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if Notify on Delete is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial alert when it detects that one of its power supplies has been lost or disconnected, and then send a second alert when it detects that power has been restored . (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

• Address1,2 and 3: These parameters are used to select which of the three email addresses defined by the Email Messages menu (see Section 6.8.11) will receive the email alarm notifications generated by this alarm. The address parameters allow you to select one or any combination of the addresses defined in the Email Messages menu. (Default = All Enabled)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Alarm: Power Loss")

9-28

Alarm configuration

9.10. Emergency shutdown alarm (CPM series units only)

The emergency shutdown alarm can provide notification when the emergency shutdown function of the CPM is activated.

Notes: • Emergency stop alarm is only available on CPM series units.

• In order for the CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 6.8.11.

• In order for CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages must be enabled, as described in Section 6.8.2 and Section 11.

• In order for CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled, as described in Section 6.8.7 and Section 12.

To configure the emergency shutdown alarm, you must access the CPM command mode with a password, which allows administrator-level commands. The Power Loss Alarm configuration menu provides the following parameters:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note:• To cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply disable the Enable Activation parameter and then enable it again.

• ResendDelay: How long CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

• NotifyUponClear: If this option is enabled, CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if Notify When Released is enabled, the CPM will send an initial notification when it detects that EPO has started, and then send a second notification when the device detects that power has been restored. (Default = On)

9-29

Alarm configuration

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Emergency Shutdown")

9-30

Alarm configuration

9.11. The alarm clock without ringtone

The No Dial Tone alarm allows the DSM/CPM to monitor a phone line connected to an external modem installed in the DSM/CPM setup port and then provide an alert when the DSM/CPM detects that the phone line is dead or no call tuna fish.

When the No Dial Tone alarm is enabled, the DSM/CPM monitors the phone line for a dial tone. If no ringtone is detected for the currently set Reset/No Phone Interval value, the No Phone Alarm can send an email notification over a network connection. In the event that the DSM/CPM is not connected to a network cable, the DSM/CPM will also create an entry in the alarm log indicating that the No Dial Tone alarm was triggered.

Notes: • For this alarm to work, the No Dial Tone alarm must first be enabled and the Reset/No Dialtone Interval and Reset/No Dialtone Scaler values must be set, see Section 6.7.2.

• In order for DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via email, the communication parameters must first be defined as described in Section 6.8.11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via syslog message, the syslog parameters must first be defined and syslog messages enabled as described in Section 6.8.2 and Section 11.

• For DSM/CPM to provide alarm notification via SNMP trap, SNMP parameters must first be defined and SNMP traps enabled as described in Section 6.8.7 and Section 12.

The following parameters can be set in the configuration menu for the no-call alarm:

• TriggerEnable: Enables/disables the trigger for this alarm. When disabled, this alarm is turned off. (Default = On)

Note: • When an analog alarm is generated, to cancel an alarm without correcting the condition that caused the alarm, simply turn the Enable Trigger parameter off and then on again.

• The "TriggerEnable", "NotifyUponClear", "EmailMessage" and "Address 1, 2 and 3" parameters all include "Copy to All Triggers" options, which you use to enable/disable the corresponding parameter for all DSM alarms /CP . For example, if the No Dialtone Alarm Trigger Enable parameter is set to On (Copy to all triggers), all other DSM/CP alarms will also be triggered.

• ResendDelay: How long DSM/CPM waits before resending an email message generated by this notification if the first attempt to send the notification fails. (Default = 60 minutes)

9-31

Alarm configuration

• NotifyUponClear: If this item is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an additional notification when the condition that caused the alarm is resolved. For example, if alert on deletion is enabled, DSM/CPM will send an initial alert when it detects that the dial tone for the external modem has been lost, and then send a second alert when it detects that the dial tone has restored. (Default = On)

• Email Message: Enables/disables email notification for this alarm. (Default = On)

Note: If email addresses were previously specified, the current custom email addresses are listed in the text below the parameters.

• Subject: This parameter specifies the text to be displayed in the Subject field for all email notifications generated by this notification. (Default = "Notification: No ringtone")

10-1

10. The status screens

Status screens are used to display status information about DSM/CPM serial ports, switch sockets, network ports, connection groups, temperature log, alarm log, and audit log. Status screens are available through both the text interface and the web browser interface.

10.1. product status

The Product Status screen lists the model number, power rating, product serial number, and other information about the DSM/CPM module. To display the product status screen via the text interface, type /J* and then press Enter. To view the product status screen through the web browser interface, click the "Product Status" link.

Note: The information provided on the Product Status screen is primarily intended to assist WTI support personnel in diagnosing problems with backup devices.

10.2. The network status screen

The Network Status screen displays the activity on the DSM/CPM virtual network ports. To view the network status screen, you must access command mode with a password, which allows access to administrator-level commands.

To view the network status screen via the text interface, type /SN and press Enter. To view the Network Status screen through the web browser interface, click the Network Status link.

10-2

The status screens

10.3. The port status screen

The Port Status screen displays the current status of the serial ports, including the custom port name and port mode for each serial port, as well as the buffer count, connection status, and the names of all users who have access to those ports.

Note: • For CPM series devices, the port status screen is combined with a screen that reports plug (socket) status as described in Section 10.4.

• When viewing port status from an account with "Administrator" or "Superuser" command access, all DSM/CPMS serial ports are displayed.

• If the port status is viewed by an account with user command or view-only access, only the serial ports allowed by that account are displayed.

• The Port Status screen also shows the current status of the DSM/CPM's internal modem port.

To view the port status screen via the text interface, type /S and press Enter. To view the port status screen through the web browser interface, hover over the Port Status link. When the flight menu appears, click the Serial Port Status link.

Notes: • For DSM-8 series and CPM-800 series devices, Port9 is the internal modem

Port.

• On CPM-1600 series devices, port 17 is the internal modem port.

• For DSM-24 series devices, Port25 is the internal modem port.

• For DSM-40 series devices, Port41 is the internal modem port.

• The modem port is not present on DSM model numbers ending with the letter "NM" or on CPM model numbers ending with the letter "N".

10-3

The status screens

10.4. The port and connector status screens (CPM series only)

On CPM series devices, the port and slot status screens show the status of both serial ports and switch slots. The Port Status screen lists the custom port name and port mode for each serial port, as well as the buffer count, connection status, and the names of all users who currently have access to those ports. The Plug Status screen displays the on/off status of the outlets and lists custom plug names, start/sequence delay values, and default on/off settings.

Note: • For DSM series devices, the plug status is not listed. Instead, only the port status is displayed for DSM series devices, as described in Section 10.3.

• In the text interface, port and plug status for CPM series devices are not displayed on one screen. When the /S command is invoked, the port status screen is displayed first. Press Enter to view the Plug Status screen.

• In the web browser interface, port and connection status for CPM series devices are displayed on two separate screens.

• When viewing port status and plug status from an account with administrator or superuser command access, all serial ports and plugs in the CPM series are listed. When port status and plug status are viewed from an account with user command or view-only access, only the serial ports and switch sockets allowed by that account are displayed.

• The current temperature reading for the CPM Series device is also displayed on the Connection and Connector Status screens.

• The Plug Status screen also shows the status of the internal modem port.

To view the port and plug status screen via the text interface, type /S and press Enter. To view the port and plug status screen through the web browser interface, click the Port Status link.

Note that when calling the /S command, the command line may also contain arguments indicating the on/off state for a single outlet, two or more specific outlets, or a range of outputs:

/S Displays configuration details and ON/OFF status for all sockets.

/S s Displays the enabled/disabled status of a socket, where s is the name or number of the desired socket.

/S s+s Displays the on/off status for two or more specific sockets, where s is the number or name of each desired socket. A plus sign (+) is inserted between each outlet number or outlet name.

/S s:s Displays the on/off status for a range of sockets, where s is the number or name of the socket at the start and end of the range of desired outputs. A colon (:) is inserted between the two output numbers or names to mark the start and end of the range.

10-4

The status screens

10.5. The Connector Group Status screen (CPM series only)

On CPM Series units, the Plug Group Status screen can be displayed to view configuration details and enable/disable status for custom plug groups.

Notes: • The Plug Group status screen is not available on DSM series devices.

• If the plug status screen is viewed from an account with administrator or superuser command access, all plugs and plug groups can be viewed. When the plug status screen is viewed by an account with user command or view-only access, the device displays only the plugs and plug groups allowed by that account.

• The configuration procedure for individual links is described in section 7.6. The procedure for defining connector groups is described in Section 7.5.

• To view the Plug Group Status screen, you must first define at least one plug group as described in Section 7.5.

To display the connector group status screen via the text interface, type /SG and then press Enter. To view the plug group status screen via the web browser interface, click the "Connection Group Status" link, then select the desired plug group from the resulting sub-directory and click the "Get Group Status" button connection".

Note: The SNMP index element (text interface only) lists the permanent reference number that CPma assigns to each plug group. The SNMP index number allows MIB commands to target a specific plug group. The SNMP index number does not change when other plug groups are deleted or created.

10-5

The status screens

10.6. The current measurement status screen (CPM-C series only)

The Current Meter Status screen is primarily used to view current readings for amps, watts, voltage, and temperature for the CPM-C Series device. To display the Current Measurement Log screen, do the following:

Note: Power and performance monitoring features are not available on standard DSM devices or on CPM series devices that do not have the power monitoring option.

In addition to displaying the current measurement status screen, the /M command can also be used to display current, voltage, and power readings for each switching output on CPM-C series devices. When the /M command is invoked, the command line can also include arguments that indicate the status of individual stores, specific pairs of sockets, or a range of stores:

/M Displays the current measurement status screen.

/M s Displays the current, voltage, and wattage values for a single plug or outlet, where s is the name or number of the desired outlet.

/M s+s Displays current, voltage, and power values for two or more specified outlets, where s is the number or name of each desired outlet. A plus sign (+) is inserted between each outlet number or outlet name.

/M s:s Displays the current, voltage, and power values for a range of outputs, where s is the output number or name at the start and end of the range of outputs you want. A colon (:) is inserted between the two output numbers or names to mark the start and end of the range.

/M a Displays branch A current, voltage and power values.

/M b Displays branch B current, voltage and power values.

Notes: • Current, voltage and power measurement values are displayed in the text interface

For a single outlet, a pair of outlets, or a range of outlets, the readings for each specified outlet are displayed as four comma-separated values. First the current is displayed, then the voltage, then the power.

• When power consumption is reported as a percentage of maximum power, the displayed value reflects the percentage of actual maximum power used, not the percentage of reduced maximum power used.

To view the current measurement status screen, do the following:

• TextInterface: Type /M and press Enter.

• Web Browser Interface: Hover over the Current Count link on the left side of the screen. When the escape menu appears, click the Current measurement status link.

10-6

The status screens

10.7. The event logs

Event logs can be used to review recent user activities, alarm events, and temperature trends recorded by the DSM/CPM module. In addition, devices of the CPM series with the "power measurement" option also offer the possibility of checking power and power consumption data. To view, download, or delete event logs, you must access the command mode with a password that allows commands at the administrator or superuser level.

10.7.1. View event logs using the text interface: In the text interface, you can access the event logs by typing /L and pressing Enter. In this case, the View Logs menu offers the ability to view the following event logs:

• AuditLog: The audit log file provides a record of most command activity on the DSM/CPM module, including port connections and disconnections, as well as connection and disconnection activities. The audit log submenu provides the options to view, download, or delete activity records.

Note: For CPM series units, power switching functions are also reported in the audit log.

• AlarmLog: The alarm log provides a record of all events triggered by a DSM/CPM alarm function. The Alarm Log submenu provides the ability to view, download or delete alarm log files.

• CurrentMeteringLog: (CPM series only with Current Metering option) The Current Metering Log submenu allows you to view the current metering data for the CPM unit or individual plugs, download the current metering log in CSV or XML format, or Delete Current Metering Log.

Note: The power measurement log is not available on DSM series devices or CPM series devices that do not have the power measurement option.

• PowerMeteringLog: (CPM series with power metering option only) The Power Metering Log submenu allows you to view power consumption data for the CPM module via plug-in and download power metering data.

Note: The PowerMetering protocol is not available on DSM series devices or CPM series devices that do not have the power metering option.

• TemperatureLog: The Temperature Log provides a log of DSM/CPM temperature readings.

Note: The temperature log is not available on CPM series devices that have the current measurement option. Instead, the temperature readings are listed in the CurrentHistoryLog.

10-7

The status screens

10.7.2. View event logs using the web browser interface: In the web browser interface, you can access the event logs using the links and drop-down menus on the left side of the screen. When viewing event logs through the web browser interface, use the Logs, Current Measurement, Power Measurement, and Temperature links and their drop-down menus to access the desired event log.

Notes: • Current measurement file and power measurement log file are only available on

CPM series devices that have the current measurement option.

• The Logs link allows you to view or download the text format audit log and/or alarm connection log.

• The Current Measurement link allows you to view the Current Measurement status screen as described in Section 10.6 or view and/or download the Current Measurement history in ASCII, CS or XML format.

• The Power Measurement link allows you to view the power range screen or view and/or download the power history screen in ASCII, CS or XML format.

10.8. The diagnostic ports screen

The Port Diagnostics screen provides more detailed information about each port. To display the Diagnostic Ports screen, enter the Text Interface command mode and type /SD [Enter].

Note: The diagnostic ports screen is only available through the text interface.

When the /SD command is invoked from an Administrator or SuperUser level account, the Port Diagnostics screen displays the status of all ports. When the /SD command is invoked from a user or ViewOnly account, the diagnostic ports screen only displays the status of ports specifically allowed by that account.

10.9. Alias Status Screen

The AliasStatus screen lists custom IP aliases for each serial port, along with each port's custom name and the currently selected Direct Connect setting for each serial port.

To display the alias status screen via the text interface, type /SA and press Enter. To view the Alias Status screen through the web browser interface, hover over the Port Status link on the left side of the screen, wait for the flight menu to appear, and then select Alias Status from the menu window.

When the alias status screen is viewed from an administrator or SuperUser level account, the screen displays the status of all ports. When the alias status screen is viewed by a user or ViewOnly account, the screen only shows the status of ports specifically allowed by the account.

10-8

The status screens

10.10. The alarm status screen

The Alarm Status screen lists all available custom alarms and whether or not each alarm has been activated. The resulting screen will show "Yes" (or 1) for alarms that activate or "No" (or 0) for alarms that do not activate. If necessary, the /AS command line can also include an optional alarm argument that causes the device to display the status of a single alarm. See Section 18.3.1 for a list of alarm arguments.

10.11. The port parameter screens

The /W (Who) command displays more detailed information about an individual DSM/CPM port. Instead of listing general connection information for all ports, the Port Parameters screen displays all defined parameters for a specific port.

When invoked from an Administrator or SuperUser level account, the /W command can be used to view parameters for all DSM/CPM serial ports as well as the network port. When the /W command is invoked from a user or ViewOnly account, only the serial port parameters allowed specifically for that account are displayed, and no network port parameters are displayed.

The /W command uses the following format:

/P xx [input]

Where xx is the desired port number. When the /W command is invoked on a serial port by a user with Administrator or SuperUser level command access, the letter "N" can be entered as the command argument to display the network port parameters.

Note: • The Port Parameters screens are only available through the text interface.

• When /WcommandisinvokedbyAdministratorlevelaccount that has access to the modedeviatheNetworkPort command, all NetworkPort Parameters will be displayed..

• When the /W command is invoked from a superuser account that has access to command mode through the network port, only the Logout Sequence, Logout Character, and Accept Interrupt options are displayed.

11-1

11. SSH and Telnet Capabilities

11.1. network port numbers

Whenever an incoming SSH or Telnet session connects to a DSM/CPM serial port, the Port Status screen and Port Diagnostics screen will show that the serial port is currently connected to port "Nn" (where "N" indicates a network connection and " " n" is a number that lists the logical network port in use, for example "N11".) This number "Nn" is referred to as the logical network port number.

11.2. SSH encryption

DSM/CPM supports SSH connections that allow secure, encrypted network access. To communicate with DSM/CPM via the SSH protocol, your network node must have a suitable SSH client.

Note that when you call the /K (Send SSH Key) command, DSM/CPM can also provide you with a public SSH key that can be used to optimize the connection to DSM/CPM when using the SSH protocol.

Although you can SSH into the device without the public key, the public key provides authentication for the DSM/CPM, and once this key is provided to the SSH client, the client no longer displays a notification indicating that the CPM DSM/CPM is not authenticated user when the client tries to connect.

The /K command uses the following format:

/K[Enter]

where k is an argument that specifies the type of public key displayed. The k argument offers the following options:

1. SSH1

2. SSH2 RSA

3. SSH2-DSA

For example, to get the SSH public key for an SSH2 RSA client, type /K 2 and then press [Enter].

Note: Even though DSM/CPM does not support SSH1, the /K1 command still returns a key for SSH1.

11-2

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.3. Die Direct Connect-Funktion

With the Direct Connect feature, you can start a Telnet, SSH, or Raw Socket session with DSM/CPM and connect directly to a specific serial port of your choice without first displaying the command interface. This allows you to connect to a TCP port that maps directly to one of the DSM/CPM's serial ports.

Direct Connect uses unique, predefined TCP port numbers for each serial port. The user connects to the port of their choice by pasting the corresponding TCP port number into the SSH or Telnet login command line. The Direct Connect feature can be configured individually on each serial port and can be used to connect to any port, passive, buffer or modem mode.

11.3.1. Standard Telnet, SSH, and Raw Socket Protocol With the Direct Connect feature, you can establish port connections using either standard Telnet, SSH encryption, or Raw Socket. When using the standard Telnet protocol, DSM/CPM will respond to all IACs.

When configuring a serial port, note that direct connections via the SSH protocol are possible. Note that the Direct Connect option (Port Configuration menu, item 31) must be set to On - Password as described in Section 11.3.2.

When configuring a serial port, note that direct connections are possible in standard telnet or raw socket mode. Note that the Direct Connect option (Port Configuration menu, item 31) can be set to either On - Password or On - No Password.

11.3.2. Configuration: The Direct Connect feature is configured for each port through the Port Configuration (/P nn) menus, item 31, "Direct Connect". The following options are available:

1. OFF: Disable Direct Connect on this port. (Predefined)

2. ON-NOPASSWORD: The Direct Connect feature is enabled on this port, but no password is required to connect to the port.

a) When the connection is established, the user is immediately connected directly to the specified port and the client is notified at the TCP level.

b) This option is reserved for cases where security is ensured by the connected device.

Note: The SSH Direct Connection feature is disabled when On-NoPassword is selected.

3. ON-PASSWORD: The Direct Connect feature is enabled on this port, but you must enter a password before a direct connection can be established.

a) Upon login, DSM/CPM will ask for a username and password. If a valid username/password is entered, DSM/CPM will return a message confirming the connection and stating the port name and number (assuming the user account allows access to the destination port).

b) If a valid username/password is not entered within 30 seconds or three attempts, the port and connection will time out.

11-3

SSH and Telnet capabilities

4. OFF-BreakonRawDisconnect: If the Direct Connect option has been enabled as described in steps 2 or 3 above, this option can be used to configure DSM/CPM to send a break character whenever a Raw-Socket connection is terminated on this port. . As described below, the Break on Raw Disconnect option works when the password feature is enabled or disabled as described below:

a) PasswordDisabled: To use the Break on Raw Disconnect option when the Direct Connect password is disabled, do the following:

I. Go to the serial port configuration menu for the desired DSM/CPM serial port, then use the Direct Connect option to select the On - No Password option. After "On - No Password" is selected, the menu returns to the serial port configuration screen.

ii. Use the Direct Connect option to select the Break on Raw Disconnect parameter. After "Break on disconnect" is selected, the menu returns to the Direct Connect configuration screen. Note that at this point the prompt for disconnect on logout is Enabled - disconnect on logout, indicating that both direct connect and disconnect on logout are enabled.

a) Password Enabled: To use the Break on Raw Disconnect option with the Direct Connect password enabled, do the following:

I. Go to the serial port configuration menu for the desired DSM/CPM serial port, then select On - Password from the Direct Connect option. After "On - Password" is selected, the menu will return to the serial port configuration screen.

Notes: • If you want to make "RawSocket" connections to DSM/CPM serial ports, the "RawSocket Access" feature must also be enabled on the network port as described in Section 7.8.1.

• If you want to use SSH to connect directly to DSM/CPM, the Direct Connect ON-PASSWORD option must be selected.

• If administrator-level commands are disabled on the network port, accounts that allow administrator-level commands cannot initiate a direct connection.

• When administrator-level commands are enabled on the network port, both administrator and non-admin accounts can connect directly.

• If your user account does not allow access to the destination port, the connection will be refused.

11-4

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.3.3. Connecting to a serial port using Direct ConnectDirect Connect The TCP port numbers are as follows:

1. StandardTelnetDirectConnection (with password):

a) DSM-8 series and CPM-800 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2101 to 2108. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2109.

b) CPM-1600 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2101 to 2116. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2117.

c) DSM-24 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2101 to 2124. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2125.

d) DSM-40 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2101 to 2140. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2141.

2. StandardTelnetDirectConnection(ohnePasswort):

a) DSM-8 series and CPM-800 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2301 to 2308. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2309.

b) CPM-1600 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2301 to 2316. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2317.

c) DSM-24 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2301 to 2324. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2325.

d) DSM-40 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2301 to 2340. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2341.

11-5

SSH and Telnet capabilities

3. SHDdirectConnection (with password):

a) DSM-8 and CPM-800 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2201 to 2208. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2209.

b) CPM-1600 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2201 to 2216. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2217.

c) DSM-24 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2201 to 2224. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2225.

d) DSM-40 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 2201 to 2240. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 2241.

4. RawSocketDirectConnection (with password):

a) DSM-8 series and CPM-800 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3101 to 3108. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3109.

b) CPM-1600 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3101 to 3116. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3117.

c) DSM-24 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3101 to 3124. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3125.

d) DSM-40 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3101 to 3140. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3141.

11-6

SSH and Telnet capabilities

5. RawSocketDirectConnection (no password):

a) DSM-8 and CPM-800 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3301 to 3308. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3309.

b) CPM-1600 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3301 to 3316. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3317.

c) DSM-24 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3301 to 3324. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3325.

d) DSM-40 series devices: • Serial ports: TCP port numbers 3301 to 3340. • Optional internal modem port: TCP port number 3341.

Note: To create a RawSocketDirect connection, the "RawSocketAccess" parameter must be enabled for the network port, as described in Section 7.8.1.

When establishing a direct connection, the correct TCP port number must be used. If the conditions are acceptable (eg the destination port must be free and properly configured), a direct connection will be made, with one possible exception. Depending on your configuration settings, you may need to enter a password first.

Note: If a DirectConnect attempt fails because the port is busy, the call is dropped at the TCP level.

Connection Example 1. Assume port 8 is configured as described in Section 11.3.2

DSM/CPM's IP address is 1.2.3.4 and you want to make a standard Telnet connection on port 8 (TCP port number 2108). On a UNIX system, the Connect command would then be called as follows:

$ telnet 1.2.3.4 2108 [Enter]

2. DSM/CPM first sends the site ID, port number, port name, and telnet port number. Once a connection is established, the message "Connected" is sent.

11-7

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.3.4. Ending a Direct Connect session To end a Direct Connect session, use the client's Logout feature. The following happens immediately when the connection is initiated by the client:

1. The network port is disconnected from the serial port.

2. The network session has ended.

3. The serial port will sleep.

Notes: • The SequenceDisconnect command defined through the port

Configuration menus cannot be used to terminate a direct connection.

• Any DSM/CPM port that allows admin or superuser level commands can terminate a direct connection to another port by issuing the /D text interface commands as described in Section 6.2.1.2 or through the port control screen of the web browser interface as described in Section 6.2.1.3.

• Acknowledgment of data received from the DSM/CPM network port does not automatically indicate that the data has been fully sent through the serial port. Data may still reside in DSM/CPM buffers. Any data queued at the time of client-initiated disconnection is discarded and not forwarded to the connected device.

11-8

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.4. IP-Aliasing

In addition to the Direct Connect feature described in Section 11.3, DSM/CPM also supports IP aliasing, which provides another method of directly connecting to any serial port on the device without first accessing the command interface. IP aliasing allows you to assign an IP address to a DSM/CPM serial port and then connect directly to that port via Telnet, SSH, or Raw Socket.

To configure the DSM/CPM serial ports for an IP alias, you must first access the Serial Port Configuration menu for the desired ports, as described in Section 7.7.2. Additionally, you must set the Direct Connect feature to either On - Password or On - No Password, as described in Section 7.7.2.

Once a DSM/CPM serial port is configured as described above, users can connect to the port in the same way they would connect to any other IP address. For example, if the IP alias of the serial port was set to "1.2.3.4", users could connect to the port with the following connect command:

$ telnet 1.2.3.4 [Intro]

Notes: • The IP Alias feature is only available when the Direct Connect feature is set to On-Password or On-NoPassword.

• To view the assigned IP alias for each serial port via the text interface, type /SA and press [Enter].

11-9

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.5. Create an outgoing Telnet connection

DSM/CPM includes a /TELNET command that can be used to establish an outgoing telnet connection. To use the /TELNET command, you must access the command mode of the DSM/CPM text interface through one of the DSM/CPM's RS232 serial ports, using an account that allows telnet access and outgoing access, as described below .

Notes:• For the /TELNET command to work, Telnet access and outgoing service access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 7.4.

• The /TELNET command is only available through the text interface.

• If you are connected via the network port, the /TELNET command will only work if outgoing access is enabled as described in Section 7.8.1.

To establish an outgoing telnet connection, access the text interface through an available serial port, use an account that allows both telnet access and outgoing access, and then invoke the /TELNET command in the following format:

/TELNET[Port] [Raw] [Input]

where:ip is the destination IP address.

port Is an optional argument that can be included to specify the destination port in the IP address.

raw is an optional argument that can be included to specify a raw socket connection. To create a raw socket connection, the command line must end with the text "raw".

For example, to create a raw socket, outbound telnet connection to port 2000 at IP address 255.255.255.255, access through a free DSM/CPM serial port with an account that allows telnet access and outbound access, Switch to interface command mode text and call TELNET command as follows:

/TELNET 255.255.255.255 2000 raw [Enter]

11-10

SSH and Telnet capabilities

11.6. Create an outgoing SSH connection

An outgoing SSH connection can be established using the DSM/CPM /SSH command. To use the /SSH command, you must access the command mode of the DSM/CPM text interface through one of the DSM/CPM's RS232 serial ports using an account that allows SSH access and outgoing access, as described below.

Notes:• For the /SSH command to work, SSH access and outgoing service access must be enabled for your user account as described in Section 7.4.

• The /SSH command is only available through the text interface.

• If you are connected via the network port, the /SSH command will not work.

To create an outbound SSH connection, access the text interface through a free serial port, use an account that allows both SSH access and outbound access, and then invoke the /SSH command in the following format:

/SSH-large[Enter]

where:ip is the destination IP address.

-l (lowercase "L") Specifies that the next argument is the connection name.

Username is the username you want to use to log in to the target device.

For example, to SSH out to a device with IP address 255.255.255.255 and username "Worker", access through a free DSM/CPM serial port with an account that allows SSH access and outbound access, Go to the command mode of the text interface and call the SSH command as follows:

/SSH 255.255.255.255 -l Employee [Enter]

12-1

12. Syslog Messages

The Syslog function can generate a log file for each alarm event. When these event logs are generated, they are sent to a syslog daemon located at an IP address defined by the Network Parameters menu.

12.1. Construction

Before you can use this feature, you must configure the real-time clock and calendar through the "System Parameters" menu and set the IP address for the syslog daemon through the "Network port configuration" menu.

To configure the syslog function, proceed as follows:

1. Command mode access: Note that the following configuration menus are only available for accounts that allow admin-level commands.

2. SystemParametersMenu: Go to the System Parameters menu as described in Section 7.2, then set the following parameters:

a) SetClockandCalendar: Set real-time clock and calendar and/or configure and enable NTP server function.

3. Network Parameters menu: Go to the Network Parameters menu as described in Section 7.8, then set the following parameters:

a) SyslogIPAddress: Specify the IP address for the device running the syslog daemon, then use the Configure Network Port menu to set the IP address for the syslog daemon.

Notes: • The Network Parameters menu allows IP addresses to be specified for both a primary syslog daemon and an optional secondary syslog daemon.

• The Syslog Address submenu in the text interface includes a ping test function that can be used against the user-selected Syslog IP address to verify that a valid IP address has been entered. For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

4. SyslogDaemon: To log messages sent by DSM/CPM, a computer must have a syslog daemon (configured on UDP port 514) running at the IP addresses specified in step 3 above.

Once the syslog address is specified, syslog messages will be generated when any of the alarms listed in Section 9 are triggered.

13-1

13. SNMP-Traps

The SNMP Trap feature allows DSM/CPM to send alarm notification messages to two different SNMP managers whenever one of the alarms listed in Section 9 is triggered.

Note: • The SNMP function cannot be configured through the SNMP manager.

• SNMP readability is limited to the system group.

• The SNMP feature includes the ability to query an SNMP manager.

• Once SNMP trap parameters are defined, SNMP traps are sent whenever an alarm is triggered and/or when a buffered serial port reaches the user-defined storage limit. See Section 9 for more information on alarm configuration.

13.1. Construction:

To configure the SNMP trap function, proceed as follows:

1. Access the commands mode using an account that allows access to commands at the administrator level.

2. SerialPortParameters: If you want to create SNMP traps that will alert you when a buffer mode port cache reaches a user-defined buffer limit, go to the Serial Port Parameters menu for the desired port, as described in Section 7.7. Here are the following:

a) PortMode: Make sure Port Mode is set to Buffer Mode.

b) SNMPTrapLevel: Set the SNMP trap level to the desired value. The SNMP trap level specifies how much data must be collected in a particular port buffer in order to generate an SNMP trap.

Notes: • It is necessary to set the SNMP trap level only if you want to create SNMP traps to notify you when data has accumulated in the port buffer. If you only want to create SNMP traps to notify you when an alarm is triggered, you do not need to set the SNMP trap level.

• If you want to create SNMP traps only to alert you when an overtemperature alarm, a loss of communication alarm, a ping no response alarm, an invalid access alarm, or a power cycle alarm is triggered, you do not need to set the buffer threshold parameter.

13-2

SNMP-Traps

3. SNMPTrapParameters: Access the SNMP Trap Parameters menu as described in Section 7.8.5. Here are the following:

a) SNMPManager1 and 2: The addresses that will receive SNMP traps generated by any of the alerts listed in Section 9. Contact your network administrator to determine the IP addresses for the SNMP managers, then use Network Parameters menu to set the IP address for each SNMP manager. Note that it is not necessary to define both SNMP managers.

Notes: • To enable the SNMP trap feature, you must define at least one SNMP manager. SNMP traps are automatically enabled if at least one SNMP manager is defined.

• The SNMPT Trap submenu includes a ping test function that can be used through the user's selected SNMP manager to verify that a valid IP address has been entered. For the ping test feature to work, your network and/or firewall must be configured to allow ping commands.

• Addresses for SNMP managers can be set in IPv4 or IPv6 format, as described in Section 7.8.4.

b) Trap Community: Contact your network administrator and then use the Network Parameters menus to set the trap community.

Once the SNMP trap parameters are defined, DSM/CPM will send an SNMP trap whenever an alarm is triggered.

14-1

14. Operation via SNMP

When SNMP access parameters are set as described in Section 7.8.4, you can manage user accounts, check power, reboot the switch, and view device status via SNMP. This section describes SNMP communication with the DSM/CPM module and lists some general commands that can be used to manage users, control failover and reboot actions, and view device status.

14.1. DSM/CPM SNMP-Agent

DSM/CPM's SNMP agent supports various configuration, control, status, and event notification functions. The managed objects are described in the WTI-CONSOLE-MIB.txt document, which can be found on the WTI website (http://www.wti.com). This MIB document can be compiled for use with the SNMP client.

14.2. SNMPv3 authentication and encryption

The main limitations of SNMPv2 were the lack of proper username/password credentials (v2 used only one type of password connection, i.e. community name) and the exclusion of encryption for data transmission over the Internet. SNMPv3 addresses both of these shortcomings.

For SNMPv3, DSM/CPM supports two forms of authentication/privacy: Auth/noPriv, which requires username/password but does not encrypt data transmitted over the Internet, and Auth/Priv, which requires username/password AND encrypts data transmitted over the Internet via DES (AES is currently not supported). For the password protocol, DSM/CPM supports either MD5 or SHA1.

14-2

Operation via SNMP

14.3. Configuration via SNMP

DSM/CPM user accounts can be viewed, created, modified and deleted via SNMP. User accounts are arranged in a table with 128 rows and indexed from 1 to 128. The user account parameters as seen via SNMP are summarized below.

• userTable::userName - 32 character username

• userTable::userPasswd - 16 digit password

• userTable::userAccessLevel - Account access level. 0 - View Only Access 1 - User Access 2 - SuperUser Access 3 - Administrator Access

• userTable::userPlugAccess - (CPM series modules only) A string of up to 16 characters, with one character for each of the 16 possible plugs on the CPM module. "0" indicates that the account does not have access to the socket and "1" indicates that the user has access to the socket.

• userTable::userPortAccess - A string of up to 41 characters, with one character for each of the possible serial ports on the DSM/CPM module. "0" indicates that the account does not have access to the port and "1" indicates that the user has access to the port.

Note: The number of ports specified in the user port access string must not exceed the number of available serial ports on the DSM/CPM module. If the user port access string specifies more serial ports than are available on the device, an error message is generated.

• userTable::userGroupAccess - (CPM series modules only) A 54-character string, with one character for each of the 54 possible login groups in the system. "0" indicates that the account does not have access to the socket group and "1" indicates that the user has access to the socket group.

• userTable::userSerialAccess - access to serial port 0 - no access 1 - access

• userTable::userTelnetSshAccess - access to the Telnet/SSH interface 0 - no access 1 - access

• userTable::userOutboundTelSshAccess - Outbound Telnet/SSH access 0 - No access 1 - Access

• userTable::userWebAccess - Web interface access 0 - No access 1 - Access

• userTable::userCallbackNum - 32-digit callback number for the account

• userTable::userSubmit - Set to 1 to submit changes.

14-3

Operation via SNMP

14.3.1. Viewing Users To view users, make a GET request for one of the user parameters for the index corresponding to the desired user.

14.3.2. Add User For an empty index, submit a SET request for the desired parameters. The minimum requirement is a username and password to create a user. All other parameters are set to their default values if not specified. To create the user, submit a SET request to the userSubmit object.

14.3.3. Modify users: For the index corresponding to the user you want to modify, issue a SET request for the parameters you want to modify. When you're done, submit a SET request to the userSubmit object.

14.3.4. Delete users: For the index corresponding to the user you want to delete, issue a username SET request with an empty string. When you're done, submit a SET request to the userSubmit object.

14-4

Operation via SNMP

14.4. Connection control via SNMP

14.4.1. control plug

Note: PowerControl functions are not available on DSM series devices. The power control functions described here are only available on CPM series units.

ON, OFF, BOOT and DEFAULT commands can be issued for plugs via SNMP. The links are arranged in an array of N rows, where N is the number of links in the system. The plug parameters are described below.

• plugTable::plugID - String specifying the plug ID

• plugTable::plugName - String specifying the custom name of the plug.

• plugTable::plugStatus - Current status of the plug 0 - plug is disabled 1 - plug is enabled

• plugTable::plugAction - Action to be performed on the plug 1 - Flag for enable (does not work) 2 - Flag for disable (does not work) 3 - Flag for BOOT (does not run) 4 - Flag for DEFAULT (does not run) 5 - Check to enable and perform plug actions. 6 - Check to disable and perform plug actions. 7 - Select to enable BOOT and perform plug actions. 8 - Select to enable DEFAULT and perform plug actions

Set plugTable::plugAction to the desired action, as indicated by the values 1-4 above, for each plug pointer to which the action should be applied. For the last plug you want to set before running the commands, use values 5-8, which will call the requested commands simultaneously.

14-5

Operation via SNMP

14.4.2. Connection pool control

Note: PowerControl functions are not available on DSM series devices. The power control functions described here are only available on CPM series units.

ON, OFF, BOOT and DEFAULT commands can be issued for connection groups via SNMP. The connection groups are arranged in a table of 54 rows, one row for each connection group in the system. The plug group parameters are described below.

• plugGroupTable::plugGroupName - String specifying the name of the plug group

• plugGroupTable::plugGroupAction - Action to perform on plug group 1 - Flag to enable (will not execute) 2 - Flag to disable (will not execute) 3 - Flag to BOOT (will not execute) 4 - Flag as DEFAULT (will not execute run) 5 - Select to enable and run plug group actions. 6 - Select to disable and perform plug group actions. 7 - Select to enable BOOT and perform plug group actions. 8 - Select to enable DEFAULT and perform plug group actions

Set plugGroupTable::plugGroupAction to the desired action for each plug group index to apply the action, as indicated by values 1-4 above. For the last group of plugs you want to set before running the commands, use values 5-8, which will call the requested commands at once.

14-6

Operation via SNMP

14.5. Configuring serial ports

Commands can be issued via SNMP to set specific serial port configuration parameters. The ports are arranged in a table with up to 41 rows, with one row for each possible serial port. The serial interface parameters are described below.

• portTable::portID - String specifying the ID of the serial port

• portTable::portThreshold - An integer specifying the serial port buffer threshold. If this value is between 1 and 32,757, the SNMP trap feature is enabled and traps are sent to SNMP managers when the buffer for this port reaches the specified value. A setting of 0 (zero) disables buffer limit-related SNMP traps on this port.

• portTable::portStatus - Displays the connection status of each port. If a port is connected, the portStatus object returns the number of the other port in the connection pair. free - logout port.

14-7

Operation via SNMP

14.6. View device status via SNMP

The status of the various DSM/CPM components can be obtained via SNMP. Plug state and environmental state are currently supported.

14.6.1. System Status - Ethernet port MAC addresses

Note: Ethernet port 1 is only available on DSM/CPM modules that include the optional secondary Ethernet port. To view the MACA address of the Ethernet port for devices that contain only one ethernet port, use the MacEth0 context option.

The MAC address for Ethernet ports 0 and 1 can be displayed with the following command:

• EnvironmentUnitTable::environmentMacEth0 The MAC address for Ethernet port 0.

• EnvironmentUnitTable::environmentMacEth1 The MAC address for Ethernet port 1.

14.6.2. connection status

Note: PowerControl functions are not available on DSM series devices. The power control functions described here are only available on CPM series units.

The status of each plug in the system can be obtained with the following command.

• plugTable::plugStatus - The status of the plug. 0 – The outlet is disabled. 1 - The plug is activated

14.6.3. Device Temperature Status Temperature status can be obtained for various variables for the DSM/CPM module. The EnvironmentUnit array contains one row.

• EnvironmentUnitTable::environmentUnitTemperature - The temperature of the DSM/CPM unit.

• EnvironmentUnitTable::environmentUnitName - Returns the specific model number for the DSM/CPM unit.

14-8

Operation via SNMP

14.6.4. Alarm Status The status of the alarm functions of the DSM/CPM module can be retrieved and displayed using the following commands:

Notes: • If the Alert Status command returns zero (0), it means that the

The alarm is inactive.

• If an alarm status command returns a (1), this means the alarm is active (triggered).

• alarmTables::alarmOverCurrentInitial - (CPM-C series only) Displays the status of the line overcurrent alarm (initial).

• alarmTables::alarmOverCurrentCritical - (CPM-C series only) Displays the status of the Line Over Current (Critical) alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmOverTemperatureInitial - Displays the state of the overtemperature alarm (initial).

• AlarmTables::alarmOverTemperatureCritical - Displays the state of the overtemperature alarm (critical).

• alarmTables::alarmCommLoss - Displays the status of the communication loss alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmPingNoAnswer - Displays the status of the Ping No Answer alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmInvalidAccessLockout — Displays the status of the Serial Port Invalid Access Lockout alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmPowerCycle - Displays the status of the power cycle alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmBufferThreshold — Displays the buffer threshold alarm status.

• AlarmTables::alarmPlugCurrent – (CPM-C series units only) Displays the status of the current plug alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmLostOptoVoltage – (Dual current input devices only) Displays the state of the voltage loss alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmNoDialtone — Displays the status of the No Dial Tone alarm.

• alarmTables::alarmEmergencyShutoff - (CPM series units only) Displays the status of the emergency shutdown feature. For more information on the EPO feature, contact WTI Technical Support at[emailprotected].

14-9

Operation via SNMP

14.7. Sending traps via SNMP

Traps reporting various device states can be sent from DSM/CPM to an SNMP management station. The following traps are currently supported.

• WarmStart trap - A trap that indicates a warm start

• ColdStart Trap – A trap indicating a cold start

• Test Trap - Test trap invoked by the user through the text interface (CLI).

DSM/CPM can send an SNMP trap to alert you when any of the available DSM/CPM alarms have been triggered. In all cases except the power cycle alarm, one trap is sent when the alarm is triggered and a second trap is sent when the alarm is cleared. See Section 9 for more information on alarm functions.

• Alarm Trap – A trap that indicates an alarm condition. For the Invalid Access Lock alarm, a trap is defined with a unique enterprise OID, whereby specific trap types are defined to indicate the setting or clearing of that particular alarm condition. There are separate traps for the Invalid Access Lock alarm. The alarm includes a "Set Trap" indicating that the alarm has been activated and a "Clear Trap" indicating that the alarm has been cleared.

• overCurrentInitialSetTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the overcurrent (initial) alarm has been activated.

• overCurrentInitialClearTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the overcurrent alarm has been cleared (initially).

• overCurrentCriticalSetTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the Over Current (Critical) alarm has been activated.

• overCurrentCriticalClearTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the overcurrent (critical) alarm has been cleared.

• overTemperatureInitialSetTrap - Indicates that the overtemperature alarm has (initially) been triggered. The trap also contains a numeric value indicating the current temperature of the device.

• OverTemperatureInitialClearTrap - Indicates that the overtemperature alarm was cleared (initially).

• overTemperatureCriticalSetTrap - Indicates that the overtemperature (critical) alarm has been triggered. The trap also contains a numeric value indicating the current temperature of the device.

• overTemperatureCriticalClearTrap - Indicates that the overtemperature (critical) alarm has been cleared.

• pingNoAnswerSetTrap - Indicates that the ping no answer alarm was triggered. The trap also contains a numeric value indicating the IP address of the device that did not respond to the ping command.

• pingNoAnswerClearTrap - Indicates that the ping no answer trap was cleared.

14-10

Operation via SNMP

• lockoutSetTrap - Indicates that an invalid access lockout alarm was triggered. The trap also contains a numeric value indicating the serial number of the port on which the lock occurred.

• lockoutClearTrap - Indicates that the invalid access lockout alarm has been cleared.

• powercycleSetTrap - Indicates that the power cycle alarm is enabled (Note that there is no corresponding clear trap for the power cycle alarm.)

• bufferThresholdCrossedSetTrap — Indicates that the amount of data in the serial port buffer has exceeded the currently set buffer limit. The trap also contains the port number where the buffer threshold alarm was generated and a numeric value indicating the amount of data currently buffered on the port.

• bufferThresholdCrossedClearTrap — Indicates that the data in the port's buffer was either read or cleared and that the buffer threshold alarm was cleared.

• plugCurrentSetTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the plug current alarm has been activated.

• plugCurrentClearTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the plug current alarm has been cleared.

• lostCommSetTrap - Indicates that a lost communication alarm was triggered.

• lostCommClearTrap - Indicates that the lost communication alarm was cleared.

• plugCurrentSetTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the plug current alarm has been activated.

• plugCurrentClearTrap - (CPM-C series units only) Indicates that the plug current alarm has been cleared.

• lostOptoVoltageSetTrap - (Dual current input devices only) Indicates that a voltage loss alarm has been triggered on a device containing optical sensors.

• lostOptoVoltageClearTrap - (Dual current input devices only) Indicates that the loss of voltage alarm has been cleared on a device with optical sensors.

• noDialtoneSetTrap - Indicates that the no dial tone alarm was triggered.

• noDialtoneClearTrap - Indicates that the no dialtone alarm was cleared.

• EmergencyShutoffSetTrap - (CPM series units only) Indicates that an emergency shutdown has been applied. For more information on the EPO feature, contact WTI Technical Support at[emailprotected].

• EmergencyShutoffClearTrap - (CPM series units only) Indicates that the emergency shutdown has been cleared. For more information on the EPO feature, contact WTI Technical Support at[emailprotected].

15-1

15. Generate web certificates

There are two different types of HTTPS security certificates: "Self-Signed" certificates and "Signed" certificates.

Note: SSL/TLS parameters cannot be set through the web browser interface. To set up SSL/TLS encryption, you need to communicate with DSM/CPM via the text interface.

Self-signed certificates can be generated by DSM/CPM without the need for an external service. The main disadvantage of self-signed certificates is that when accessing the DSM/CPM command mode through the web browser interface, the browser displays a message warning that the connection may not be secure. However, please note that even though you see this message, the communication is still encrypted and the message is just a warning that DSM/CPM is not recognized and you may not be able to connect to the website you want.

Signed certificates must be generated through an external CA (eg VeriSign®, Thawte™, etc.) and then sent to the DSM/CPM entity for entity identity verification. Once a self-signed certificate is set up, you can access the command mode without seeing the warning message displayed for accessing a self-signed certificate.

SITE ACCESS: [eth0] IPv4/IPv6

HTTP: 1. Enable: On2. Port: 80

HTTPS: 3. Enable: On4. Port: 443

SSL Certificates: 5. Common Name: 6. State or Province: 7. Location: 8. Country: 9. Email Address: 14. Harden Web Security: Medium10. Organization Name: 15. TLS Mode: TLSv1.1/TLSv1.211. Organizational Unit: 16. TRACE Method: OFF12. CSR orders: 13. CRT Commands:

Enter: #to change,to return to the previous menu...

Figure 15.1: WebAccessParameters(TextInterface Only)

15-2

Generate web certificates

15.1. Create a self-signed certificate

To generate a self-signed certificate, access the text interface with a password that allows access to administrative-level commands, and then do the following:

1. Type /N and press Enter to display the Eth0/IPv4 (Shared) Network Parameters menu.

2. In the Eth0/IPv4 Network Parameters menu, type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu (Figure 15.1). Type 3, press Enter, and then follow the instructions in the resulting submenu to enable HTTPS access.

3. Then use the Web Access menu to set the following parameters.

Notes: • When configuring DSM/CPM, make sure you set all the parameters below. Although most SSL/TLS applications only require the Common Name, in the case of DSM/CPMalloft the following parameters are mandatory.

• Any text sequence can be entered into any of these fields if desired.

• 5.CommonName: A domain name used to identify the DSM/CPM module. If you are using a self-signed certificate, this name can be anything, and you do not need to configure your domain name server to recognize this name. However, if you are using a signed certificate, your domain name server must be configured to recognize this name (eg service.yourcompanyname.com).

• 6.State or Province: The name of the state or province where the DSM/CPM entity will be located (eg, California).

• 7. City: The city or town where the DSM/CPM entity will be located (eg, Irvine).

• 8.Country: The two-digit country code for the country where the DSM/CPM is located (eg USA).

• 9. Email address: An email address that can be used to contact the person responsible for the DSM/CPM (eg.[emailprotected].)

• 10.OrganizationalName: The name of your company or organization (eg Yourcompanyname, Inc.)

• 11.OrganizationalUnit: The name of your department or department.

15-3

Generate web certificates

4. After setting parameters 5 to 11, type 12 and press Enter to access the CSR command menu. From the CSR command menu, type 1 and press Enter to generate a certificate signing request. This will overwrite any existing certificates and generate a new self-signed certificate.

a) DSM/CPM will ask you to create a password. Enter the desired password, then press [Enter]. When DSM/CPM prompts you to confirm the password, type it again and then press Enter once. After a short pause, DSM/CPM will return to the web access menu and indicate that the CSR was successfully created.

b) When the web access menu appears again, press [Esc] repeatedly until you exit the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving configuration" message appears.

5. After the new configuration is saved, test the self-signed certificate by accessing DSM/CPM via the web interface and an HTTPS connection.

a) Before the connection is restored, the DSM/CPM should display the warning message described above. This indicates that the self-signed certificate was created and saved successfully.

b) DSM/CPM will ask you to enter a username and password. After entering your password, the main menu should appear, indicating that you have successfully accessed Command Mode.

15.2. Create a signed certificate

To generate a signed certificate and get rid of the warning message, first configure your domain name server to recognize the common name (object 5) that you assign to the device. Then follow steps one through five as described in section 15.1 and then do the following:

1. Collect the newly generated certificate: Type 12 and press [Enter] to access the CSR Commands submenu.

a) In the CSR Commands submenu, type 2 and press Enter to select the Show CSR Key option.

b) DSM/CPM will ask you to configure your communication plan to receive the certificate. Set the communicator to receive a binary file, then press Enter to capture and save the file. This is the code signing request that you send to the 3rd party security service (eg VeriSign, Thawte, etc.) to sign and activate the certificate.

2. Get the signed certificate: Send the recorded certificate to the external security service. Visit the security company's website for further instructions.

15-4

Generate web certificates

3. Upload the signed certificate to DSM/CPM: After the "signed" certificate is returned from the CA, return to the Web Access menu.

a) Access the DSM/CPM command mode via the text interface using an account that allows admin-level commands as previously described. Then type /N and press Enter to bring up the Eth0/IPv4 (Shared) network settings menu.

b) In the Eth0/IPv4 (Shared) Network Parameters area, type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu.

c) In the web access menu, type 13 and press Enter to bring up the CRT command submenu.

d) In the CRT Commands submenu, type 1 and press Enter to select the Upload CRT Signed Certificate option.

e) Use your communications program to send the signed certificate in binary form to the DSM/CPM entity. When the upload is complete, press [Escape] to exit the CRT command submenu.

f) After exiting the CRT server key submenu, press [Escape] repeatedly until you exit the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving configuration" message appears.

4. After the configuration is saved, test the signed certificate by accessing DSM/CPM through the web browser interface and an HTTPS connection. For example, if the common name was set to "service.wti.com", enter "https://service.wti.com" in the address field of your browser. If the signed certificate was created and uploaded correctly, the warning message should no longer appear.

15-5

Generate web certificates

15.3. Download the server private key

When configuring DSM/CPM's SSL/TLS encryption feature (or configuring other security/authentication features), it is recommended that you download and store the server's private key. To download the server's private key, access the text interface with a password that allows access to administrative-level commands, and then do the following:

1. Type /N and press Enter to display the Eth0/IPv4 (Shared) Network Parameters menu.

2. In the Eth0/IPv4 (Shared) Network Parameters menu, type 23 and press Enter to display the Web Access menu (Figure 15.1).

a) To download the server private key from the DSM/CPM module, ensure that the SSL/TLS parameters are set as described in Section 15.1, then type 13 and press [Enter] to display the "CRT Commands" submenu .

b) From the CRT commands submenu, type 2 and press Enter to view the signed CRT certificate. Copy the resulting CRT certificate to a text file and save the text file to your hard drive.

3. To upload a CRT certificate previously stored in the DSM/CPM entity, ensure that the SSL/TLS parameters are set as described in section 15.1, return to the web access menu as in steps 1 and 2 above, and then , type 13 and press Enter to display the CRT Commands submenu.

a) From the CRT Commands submenu, type 1 and press Enter to select Upload Signed CRT Certificate.

b) Use your communications program to send the signed certificate in binary form to the DSM/CPM entity. When the upload is complete, press [Escape] to exit the CRT command submenu.

c) After exiting the CRT server key submenu, press [Escape] repeatedly until you exit the Network Parameters menu and the "Saving configuration" message appears.

15.4. Strengthen web security

In the Web Access menu, you can use the Hard Web Security option to disable SSLv3 and MEDIUM encryption for incoming web connections.

15.5. TLS-Modus

The TLS Mode parameter in the Web Access menu selects the TLS versions that the web server accepts from incoming web connections.

16-1

16. Save and restore configuration parameters

Once the DSM/CPM is properly configured, the parameters can be downloaded and saved. If the configuration is accidentally changed later, saved parameters can be uploaded to automatically reconfigure the device without having to manually assign each parameter.

Saved parameters can also be uploaded to other identical DSM/CPM modules, allowing for quick setup when multiple identical modules with similar parameters are to be configured.

The "Save Settings" function can be performed by any terminal emulator (eg PuTTy, TeraTerm©, etc.) that allows downloading.

Note: Configuration parameters can be retrieved and saved using either the web browser interface or the text interface. Saved configuration parameters can be uploaded to the DSM/CPM module via the text interface only.

16.1. Send parameters to a file

16.1.1. Download and save parameters via the text interface

1. Access the Text Interface command mode using an account that allows admin-level commands.

2. When the command prompt appears, type /U and press Enter. DSM/CPM will ask you to configure your terminal emulator to receive ASCII downloads.

a) Set up the terminal emulator to receive an ASCII file, then give a name for a file to receive the saved parameters (eg DSM.PAR).

b) Disable the newline function for the terminal emulator. This prevents command lines from being split into two parts during transmission.

3. When the terminal emulator is ready to receive the file, return to DSM/CPM's Save Parameter File menu and press Enter to continue. The DSM/CPM parameters are saved to your hard drive in the file specified in step 2 above.

4. DSM/CPM sends a series of command lines specifying the currently selected parameters. When the download is complete, press Enter to return to the command prompt.

15-2

Save and restore configuration parameters

16.1.2. Download and save parameters via web browser interface

The web browser interface also has a download function that allows you to save DSM/CPM parameters to an XML format file on your PC or laptop. To save parameters through the web browser interface, proceed as follows:

Notes: • Although DSM/CPM parameters can be saved to a file using either the text interface or the web browser interface, saved parameters can only be restored using the text interface. The reset feature is not available through the web browser interface.

• This process may vary slightly depending on your operating system and browser. In some cases, your system may perform a security scan before proceeding with the download.

1. Access the command mode of the web browser interface using an account that allows administrative level commands.

2. When the web browser interface appears, click the "Download Device Configuration" button on the left side of the screen.

3. After a short pause, your browser may display a question asking if you want to open or save the downloaded file. At this point you can either select the "Save" option to save the config file to the Downloads folder on your computer, or select "Save As" to choose a different location and/or file name for the saved config file.

16.2. Restore the received parameters

This section describes the procedure for using the terminal emulator to send saved parameters to DSM/CPM.

Note: The Restore Parameters function is only available through the text interface.

1. Start the terminal emulator and access the command mode of the DSM/CPM text interface using an account that allows administrator-level commands.

2. Configure your terminal emulator to upload an ASCII file.

3. Upload the ASCII text file with the saved DSM/CPM parameters. If necessary, enter the file name and directory path.

4. Your terminal emulator sends the ASCII text file to DSM/CPM. When the terminal program is finished uploading, be sure to exit the upload mode.

Note: If DSM/CPM detects an error in the file, it will respond with an "Invalid Parameter" message. If an error message is received, carefully examine the contents of the configuration file, correct the problem, and then retry the upload process.

5. If the parameter upload is successful, DSM/CPM will send a confirmation message and then return to the prompt. Type /S and press Enter. The status screen appears. Check the status screen to ensure that the device is configured with the saved parameters.

15-3

Save and restore configuration parameters

16.3. Restore the newly saved parameters

If you make a mistake while configuring the DSM/CPM and want to revert to previously saved parameters, the Reboot System (/I) text interface command provides the ability to restart the DSM/CPM with the previously saved parameters. This allows you to restore the device to previously saved parameters, even after you have changed and saved the parameters.

• When the /I command is not called, a submenu is displayed that offers several restart options. Option 4 is used to restore the configuration backup file. The date displayed next to option 4 indicates the date the device settings were last changed and saved.

To restore a previously saved configuration, proceed as follows:

1. Access command mode via the text interface using a username/password that allows access to admin-level commands (see Section 6.1.1.)

2. At the command prompt, type /I and press Enter. DSM/CPM will display a submenu offering various restart options.

3. From the submenu, select item 4 (Reboot and restore last known working configuration), type 4, and then press Enter.

4. The DSM/CPM will reboot and the previously saved parameters will be restored.

17-1

17. Update DSM/CPM firmware

When new, improved versions of DSM/CPM firmware become available, either the WMU Enterprise Management software (recommended) or the firmware update feature (text interface only) can be used to update the device. The following section describes the procedure for updating the DSM/CPM module using the firmware upgrade utility or the firmware update feature.

17.1. WMU Enterprise Management Software (recommended)

The preferred method for updating DSM/CPM modules is to use the WMU Enterprise Management software shipped with the module. WMU software allows you to manage firmware updates for multiple WTI devices from a single interface. A description of how to manage firmware updates via WMU can be found in the WMU User Manual, which can be obtained from the WTI User Manual archive at the following address:

http://www.wti.com/t-product-manuals.aspx

Note that to use the WMU software, the firmware version for DSM/CPM must be at least v6.23 or higher. When upgrading older DSM/CPM devices with firmware prior to version 6.23, it is recommended to use the WTI firmware upgrade utility. A ZIP file containing the installation files and other documentation for the WTI Firmware Upgrade Utility can be downloaded from the WTI FTP server located at:

ftp://wtiftp.wti.com/pub/TechSupport/Firmware/Upgrade_Utility/

See the documentation included in the ZIP file for further instructions.

17.2. Update firmware operation (alternative method)

The Firmware Update feature provides an alternative method of updating the DSM/CPM firmware. Updates can be uploaded via FTP or SFTP protocols.

Notes: • The FTP/SFTP server can only be started through the text interface.

• All other ports remain active during firmware upgrade.

• If the upgrade contains new parameters or functions not included in the previous firmware version, these new parameters will be reset to their default values.

• The upgrade process takes about 15 minutes.

1. Get the update file. Firmware changes can either be mailed to the customer or received from WTI. Insert the upgrade CDR into the floppy drive or copy the file to your hard drive.

2. Access the command mode of the serial port text interface using a username/password and a port that allows admin-level commands.

16-2

DSM/CPM firmware update

3. When the command prompt appears, type /UF and then press Enter. DSM/CPM displays a screen that offers the following options:

a) StartFTP/SFTPServersOnly(DoNOTdefaultparameters): To proceed with the upgrade keeping the custom parameters, type 1 and press Enter. After the upgrade is complete, all existing configuration settings will be restored.

b) StartFTP/SFTPServers&Default(KeepIPparameters&SSHKeys): To proceed with the upgrade and set all custom parameters to defaults except IP parameters and SSH keys, type 2 and press Enter. When the upgrade is complete, all configuration settings will be reset to factory defaults except IP configuration and SSH keys.

c) StartFTP/SFTPServers&Default(DefaultALLparameters): To proceed with the upgrade and reset the parameters to defaults, type 3 and press Enter. When the upgrade is complete, all parameters will be reset to default values.

d) StartFTP/SFTPServersforSlipStreamUpgrade: This option only upgrades the WTI management utility without upgrading the DSM/CPM operating firmware. To update only the WTI management utility, type 4 and press Enter.

Note that after choosing one of the above options, DSM/CPM will start the download servers and wait for an FTP/SFTP client to connect and upload a valid firmware binary image.

4. To continue with the upgrade, select either option 1 or option 2. DSM/CPM displays a message indicating that the device is waiting for data. Leave the current Telnet/SSH client session connected at this point.

5. Open your FTP/SFTP application and (if you haven't already done so) connect to the DSM/CPM module. To do this, use a username and password that allows access to administrative-level commands.

6. Transfer the upgrade file in MD5 format to DSM/CPM.

7. After the file transfer is complete, DSM/CPM will install the upgrade file, then reboot and stop all port connections. Note that the installation process takes about 10 minutes. The device remains accessible until reboot.

a) Some FTP/SFTP applications may not close automatically when the file transfer is complete. If this is the case, you can manually close the FTP/SFTP client after it shows that the file has been transferred successfully.

b) When the upgrade process is complete, DSM/CPM will send a message to all currently connected network sessions indicating that DSM/CPM will shut down to restart.

Note: Do not turn off the DSM/CPM device while the upgrade file is being installed. This may damage the operating system of the device.

16-3

DSM/CPM firmware update

8. If you accessed the DSM/CPM through the network port, the DSM/CPM will disconnect from the network to start the FTP/SFTP servers when the system reboots.

• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP server and save settings", you can then reconnect to DSM/CPM using your previous IP address.

• If you initially selected "Start FTP/SFTP server and default parameters", you must then connect using the default DSM/CPM IP address (default = 192.168.168.168) or via serial port 1 or modem access command mode.

When firmware upgrades are available, WTI will provide the necessary files. An updated User Guide or Addendum will also be available at that time.

18-1

18. Command Reference Guide

18.1. command contracts

Most of the commands described in this section conform to the following conventions:

• PowerControlFunctions: DSM series devices do not support power control functions. Reboot and Switch features are only available on CPM series devices.

• ApplyCommandtoAllPorts: If an asterisk is entered as the /D (Disconnect) or /E (Erase Buffer) command argument, the command is applied to all ports. For example, to clear all port buffers, type /E * [Enter].

• ApplyCommandtoAllPlugs: (CPM series modules only) If an asterisk is entered as the argument to the /ON (plug on), /OFF (plug off), or /BOOT (reboot plug) command, the command is applied to all plugs. For example, to reboot all allowed sockets, type /BOOT * [Enter].

• Command queues: (CPM series modules only) When a switch or restart command is directed to a connection that has already been switched by a previous command, the new command is queued until the connector is ready to accept more commands.

• Busy Sockets: (CPM series units only) If the Status column on the Connector Status screen contains an asterisk, it means the connector is currently busy and executing a previously issued command. When a new command is issued to a busy slot, the new command is queued for later execution.

• PlugNameWildCard: (CPM series devices only) It is not always necessary to enter the full name of the plug. Plugin names can be abbreviated on command lines by typing the first characters of the name followed by an asterisk (*). For example, a plug named "SERVER" can be specified as "S*". Note, however, that this command will also apply to any other connector name that begins with "S".

• SuppressCommandConfirmationPrompt: When calling a command that normally requires confirmation, the ",Y" option can be included to override the command confirmation prompt ("Are you sure?"). For example, to reboot Plug 4 without the Sure prompt, type /BOOT 4,Y [Enter].

• ConnectedPorts: When two ports are connected, most DSM/CPM commands are not recognized by either connected port. The only exception is the resident disconnect sequence (Default = ^ X ([Ctrl] plus [X]).)

18-2

Command Reference Guide

18.2. command summary

Command Syntax Command Access Level

Admin. SuperUser User ViewOnly

Advertising

Port and Socket Status /S [Input] X X X X

Portdiagnose /SD[Enter] X X X X

Port parameter (Who) /W [n][Enter] X X X X

Connector Group Status /SG [Enter] X X X X

Network Status /SN [Input] X X X X

Network Configuration Summary /RN[Enter] X X X X

IP-Alias-Status /SA[Enter] X X X X

Alarm status /AS[alarm][Enter] X

Current count /M[Enter] X X X X

Show connection (with echo) /V[Introduction] X X

Show connection (no echo) /VE[Introduction] X X

Hilfemenü /H [Enter] X X X X

Log functions /L [Enter] X X

Site ID / Unit Information /J [*] [Enter] X X X X

control

Exit command mode /X [Enter] X X X X

Connection - Local/DO[n][Enter] X X X

Disconnect the /D ports[Introduction] X X

read buffer /R[Enter] X X X

Clear cache /E[Enter] X X X

Boot-Plug n /BOOT[,Y] [Enter] X X X

Activate the n / ON plug[,Y] [Enter] X X X

Turn off the n / OFF plug[,Y] [Enter] X X X

By default all links /DPL[,Y] [Enter] X X X

Send parameter file /U [Enter] X

Send SSH key /K[Enter] X

Unlock invalid access /UL [Enter] X

Outbound Telnet /TELNET[Port] [raw][Enter] X X X

Outbound SSH /SSH-large[Enter] X X X

Broadcast-Modus /broadcast[Introduction] X X

Construction

System parameter /F [Input] X

Serial Port Parameters /P [Enter] X

Plug-Parameter /PL[Enter] X

Plug Group Parameters /G [Enter] X

Network Configuration - Eth0/IPv4 /N [Enter] X

Network Selection Menu - IPv4/IPv6 /N*[Enter] X

No response ping configuration /PNA[Enter] X

/RB [Enter] X reboot options

Alarm Setup /AC [Input] X

System Reboot /I [Enter] X X

Firmware Update /UF [Enter] X

Copy /CP port parameters[Enter] X

Test network configuration /TEST [Enter] X

Power control functions are only available on CPM series units.

All ports/sockets/connector groups are displayed in administrator and superuser mode. In User and ViewOnly modes, only ports/sockets/connector groups allowed by the account are displayed. DSM series devices do not contain switching plugs.

User and ViewOnly accounts are only allowed to view parameters for the port used to access command mode.

User-level accounts are only allowed to connect to serial ports that the account allows. User-level accounts are not allowed to create third-party (remote) port connections.

The ",Y" argument can be included to suppress the command confirmation line.

To call this command, Outbound Telnet/SSH and Outbound Service Access must be enabled for your account.

In SuperUser mode, configuration menus can be viewed but parameters cannot be changed.

Not available for CPM series devices. Ping No Response parameters are set through the Restart Options menu.

Current and power measurement functions are only available on CPM-C series devices.

The user directory can disable access to power and power measurement features for user and view level accounts.

18-3

Command Reference Guide

18.3. set of instructions

This section contains information about each text interface command, sorted by functionality

18.3.1. command display

/S Display port (and socket) status screen.

Displays the Ports and Connections Status screen, which lists the current status of the DSM/CPM's serial ports and swap sockets. See Section 10.3 and Section 10.4 for more information.

Notes: • CPM series devices also display plug (socket) status. Power control and power status functions are not available on DSM series devices.

• All DSM/CPM ports and outputs are displayed in administrator mode and superuser mode. In user mode and view-only mode, the port and connection status screen includes only the ports and connectors allowed by your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /S [Enter]

/SD-Display-Port-Diagnost

Provides detailed information about the status of each port. When this command is issued from a user-level or view-only account, the resulting screen displays only the parameters for the ports allowed by the account. See Section 10.8 for more information.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /SD [Enter]Response: Displays the diagnostic ports screen.

/W Display-Port-Parameter (Wer)

Displays configuration information for a single port, but does not allow modification of parameters. User and ViewOnly accounts can only view parameters for their home port. See Section 10.11 for more information.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /W [x] [Enter]

where x is the port number or port name. To display the parameters for the network port, enter an "N". If the "x" argument is omitted, the parameters for your home port are displayed.

For example, to view parameters for a port named SERVER, access command mode from a port and account that allows administrator-level commands and type /W SERVER [Enter].

18-4

Command Reference Guide

/SG Displays the connection application group status screen

Displays the Plug Group Status screen, which lists and briefly describes all custom plug groups. See Section 10.5 for more information.

Notes:• This command is not available on DSM series devices. The Plug Group Status screen is only available on CPM series devices.

• All user defined plug groups are displayed in admin mode. In superuser mode, user mode, and view-only mode, the plug groups status screen contains only the plug groups allowed by your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /S [Enter]

/SN Show network status

Displays the Network Status screen, which lists the current network connections to the DSM/CPM's network port. See Section 10.2 for more information.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /SN [Enter]

/RN Network Configuration Summary

Displays a screen with the currently selected communication settings, LDAP status, RADIUS status, email status, NTP status, PPP status, and other information.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User ViewOnlyFormat: /RN [Enter]

/IN IP-Alias-Status

Displays the Alias Status screen, which lists the currently selected port names, alias IP addresses, and Direct Connect status for the DSM/CPM serial ports. See Section 10.9 for more information.

Note: When the alias status screen is viewed from an administrator or superuser level account, the screen displays the status of all ports. When the alias status screen is viewed by a user account or view-only, the screen only shows the status of ports specifically allowed by the account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /SA [Enter]

18-5

Command Reference Guide

View /V connection (with echo)

When two DSM/CPM ports are connected, the /V command can be used to view data sent between the two connected serial ports, including the data returned.

Note: To display data sent between two connected serial ports without echo data, use the /VE command.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUserFormat: /V[Enter]

Where n is the number of one of the two connected serial ports.

Connection /VE View (no echo)

When two DSM/CPM ports are connected, the /VE command can be used to display data sent between the two connected serial ports, but not data sent back.

Note: To view data sent between two connected serial ports, including echo data, use the /V command.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUserFormat: /VE[Enter]

Where n is the number of one of the two connected serial ports.

/H help

Displays a help screen that lists most of the available text interface commands along with a brief description of each command.

Note: In administrator mode, the help screen displays most of the available DSM/CPM commands. In superuser mode, user mode, and view-only mode, the help screen lists only the commands allowed for that access level.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /H [Enter]

/L Log functions

Provides access to a menu that allows you to view the test log, alarm log, temperature log (only for DSM series units), power measurement log (only for CPM-C series units) and the power measurement log (CPM-C series units only) may be displayed. See Section 7.2.3 for more information on logging features.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUserFormat: /L [Enter]

18-6

Command Reference Guide

/M Current measurement (CPM-C series devices only)

Displays the current measurement screen, which lists current, power, voltage, and temperature readings, as well as settings for current and temperature alarms.

Notes: • CurrentMetering functions are not available on DSM series.

• If required, the user directory can disable access to power and power measurement functions for view-only user accounts.

Availability: Administrator, Superuser, User, View OnlyFormat: /M [Enter]

Alarm status screen /AS

Lists all available custom alarms and whether an alarm has been enabled, as described in section 10.10. The resulting screen will show "Yes" (or 1) for alarms that activate or "No" (or 0) for alarms that do not activate. If required, the /AS command line may also include an optional alarm argument that causes the device to display the status of a single alarm, as shown in the following table:

AlarmName AlarmArgument

Overcurrent (Initial) OCIOOvercurrent (Critical) OCCOOverTemp (Initial) OTIOOverTemp (Critical) OTCLobst Device Communication CLPing No Response PNASerial Port Invalid Access Lock LO Power Cycle (Cold Start) CBBuffer Threshold to BTPLEET Current Cutoff Down ES

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /AS [alarm] [Enter]

where alarm is an optional argument that can be used to display the status of a single alarm, as shown in the table above.

/J Display ID/module location information

Displays the custom site ID. News. When the optional asterisk (*) argument is included on the command line, the command can also display the model number, serial number, software version, and other information for the DSM/CPM module.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /J [*] [Enter]

Where * is an optional argument that can be included on the command line to indicate the exact model number and software version of the DSM/CPM module.

18-7

Command Reference Guide

18.3.2. control commands

/X Exit command mode

Exit command mode. If exported on the network port, the session is also terminated.

Note: If the command /

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User, ViewOnlyFormat: /X [Enter]

/C Connection

Creates a two-way connection between two ports. See Section 6.2 for more information. There are two types of connections:

• ResidentConnect: If the /C command specifies only one port, your resident port will connect to the specified port.

• ThirdPartyConnect: If the /C command specifies two ports, the device connects the two specified ports. Third-party connections can only be initiated from ports and accounts that allow admin-level commands.

Notes: • User-level accounts can only connect to ports explicitly allowed by the account.

• User level accounts are not allowed to create "third party" connections. For example, a user-level account connected through the network port cannot connect serial port 3 to port 4.

• Administrator and superuser level accounts are allowed to connect to any DSM/CPMS serial port.

• Serial ports must not connect third parties to the network port. For example, serial port 1 cannot connect serial port 3 to the network port.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Mode: /C[x] [Introduction]

where x is the number or name of the port(s) to connect to.

18-8

Command Reference Guide

/D Disconnect from third party

Invoke the /D command on your home port to split two other ports.

Notes: • The /D command cannot unmount the permanent installation port

• Superusers and users are restricted to the ports specifically allowed by their accounts.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUserFormat: /D[/Y][x] [Introduction]

Where:/Y (Optional) suppresses the "Are you sure?" prompt.x is the number or name of the port(s) to disconnect. To disconnect all allowed ports, enter an asterisk. To log out, enter the network port number in Nn format.

Example: To disconnect port 2 from port 3 without the "Are you sure?" prompt: Access command mode through a third port with administrator-level command capabilities and type:

/D/Y 2 [Enter] ή /D/Y 3 [Enter]

/R read buffer

Reads from buffer mode ports as described in Section 6.2.3.1.

Notes: • Superuser and user are limited to the ports explicitly allowed

their accounts

• When the /R command is called, the counter for the SNMP traps feature is also reset.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Format: /R[Enter]

Where n is the number or name of the port buffer to read.

18-9

Command Reference Guide

/E Flush buffers

Clears data from the buffer for one or more specified ports.

Notes: • Users are limited to the ports specifically allowed by their accounts

• Deleted data cannot be recovered.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Format: /E[/Y][x] [Introduction]

Where:x is the number or name of the port buffer(s) to delete. To clear buffers for all ports, enter an asterisk. /Y (Optional) Removes SURE; (Yes No)".

Example: To clear the buffer for port 3, access command mode with an account that allows access to port 3, then type /E 3 [Enter].

/BOOT Start the boot cycle

Starts a boot cycle on the selected plugs or plug groups. When performing a boot cycle, a CPM series device first disables the selected plugs, then pauses for the user-defined boot delay/sequence time, then re-enables the plug(s). The /BOOT command can also be entered as /BO.

Notes: • This command is not available on DSM series devices. The boot command is only available on CPM series devices.

• If the /BOOT command is not used to reboot multiple plugins, the boot/sequence delay periods are applied as described in Section 7.6.

• When invoked in administrator or superuser mode, this command can be applied to all plugs and plug groups on the device. When invoked in user mode, this command can only be applied to the plugs and/or plug groups enabled for your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Mode: /BOOT[,Y] [Enter] oder /BO[Enter]

Wow:

n The number or name of the plugs or plug groups you want to start. To apply the command to multiple plugs, type a plus sign (+) between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of slots, enter the numbers for the first and last slots of the range, separated by colons (:). To apply the command to all plugins allowed by your account, enter an asterisk (*).

,Y (Optional) Removes the command prompt.

Example: Assuming your account allows access to plug 2 and plug 3. To start a boot cycle on plug 2 and 3 without displaying the optional command prompt, issue one of the following command lines:

/BOOT 2+3,Y [Enter] ή /BO 2+3,Y [Enter]

18-10

Command Reference Guide

/ON Enable plugs.

Enables selected sockets or socket groups as described in Section 6.4.2.

Notes: • This command is not available on DSM series devices. The On command is only available on CPM series devices.

• If the /ON command is not used to switch more than one socket, the start/sequence delay periods as described in Section 7.6 apply.

• When invoked in administrator mode or superuser mode, this command can be applied to all plugs and plug groups on the CPMSeries unit. When invoked in user mode, this command can only be applied to the plugs and/or plug groups enabled for your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, UserFormat: /ON[,Y] [Enter]

Wow:

n The number or name of the plugs or plug groups you want to enable. To apply the command to multiple plugs, type a plus sign (+) between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of slots, enter the numbers for the first and last slots of the range, separated by colons (:). To apply the command to all plugins allowed by your account, enter an asterisk (*).

,Y (Optional) Removes the command prompt.

Example: Let's say your account allows access to plug 2 and plug 3. To enable plugs 2 and 3 without displaying the optional command prompt, call the following command line:

/ON 2+3,Y [Input]

18-11

Command Reference Guide

/DISABLE Disable connectors.

Disables selected plugs or groups of plugs as described in Section 6.4.2. If the /OFF command is used to switch more than one link, the start/sequence delay period is applied as described in Section 7.6. The /OFF command can also be entered as /OF.

Note: • This command is not available on DSM series devices. The Off command is only available on CPM series devices.

• When invoked in administrator mode or superuser mode, this command can be applied to all plugs and plug groups on the CPMSeries unit. When called in user mode, the command can only be applied to the plugs and/or plug groups that are enabled for your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Mode: /OFF[,Y] [Enter] oder /OF[,Y] [Enter]

Wow:

n The number or name of the plugs or plug groups you want to disable. To apply the command to multiple plugs, type a plus sign (+) between each plug number. To apply the command to a range of slots, enter the numbers for the first and last slots of the range, separated by colons (:). To apply the command to all plugins allowed by your account, enter an asterisk (*).

,Y (Optional) Removes the command prompt.

Examples: Assume that your account allows access to Plug 2 and Plug 3. To disable Plug 2 and 3 on the DSM/CPM module without displaying the optional command prompt, issue one of the following command lines:

/OFF 2+3, Y [Enter] ή /OF 2+3, Y [Enter]

/DPL Sets all plugs to default state

Sets all switching outputs to the user-defined default state. See Section 7.6 for information on how to set default settings for sockets.

Notes: • This command is not available on DSM series devices. The /DPL command is only available on CPM series devices.

• When called in administrator and superuser mode, this command applies to all sockets on the device. When called in user mode, the command will only apply to the sockets allowed by your account.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Format: /DPL[,Y] [Enter]

where ,Y is an optional command argument that can be included to hide the command prompt.

18-12

Command Reference Guide

/U Send parameters to file

Sends all DSM/CPM configuration parameters to an ASCII text file as described in Section 16. This allows you to back up the DSM/CPM module configuration.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /U [Enter]

/K Send SSH key

Instructs DSM/CPM to provide you with an SSH public key for authentication purposes. This public key can then be provided to the SSH client to prevent the SSH client from warning you that the user is not recognized when attempting to SSH. See Section 11.2 for more information.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /K k [Enter]

where k is a required argument specifying the key type. The k argument offers the following options: 1 (SSH1), 2 (SSH2 RSA), 3 (SSH2 DSA).

/UL Unlock Port (Invalid Access Lock)

Manually clears DSM/CPM's Invalid Access Lock feature. Typically, when a series of failed connection attempts is detected, the Invalid Access Lockout feature can disable the affected port or protocol for a user-specified period of time to prevent further access attempts. When the /UL command is invoked, DSM/CPM immediately unblocks all ports and protocols that are currently in the blocked state.

Availability: Administrator Format: /UL [Enter]

/TELNET Outbound telnet

Creates an outgoing telnet connection.

Notes:• For the /TELNET command to work, access to the Telnet/SSHandOutbound service must be enabled for your user account, as described in Section 7.4. In addition, Telnet access and External access must also be enabled through the Network Parameters menu as described in Section 7.8.1.

• If you are connected through the network port, the /TELNET command will not work.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Mode: /TELNET[Port] [Raw] [Input]

where:ip is the destination IP address. The IP address can be entered in IPv4 or IPv6 format. port Is an optional argument that can be included to specify the destination port in the IP address. raw is an optional argument that can be included to specify a raw socket connection. To create a raw socket connection, the command line must end with the text "raw".

18-13

Command Reference Guide

/SSH Outbound SSH

Creates an outgoing SSH connection.

Notes:• For the /SSH command to work, access to the Telnet/SSHandOutbound service must be enabled for your user account, as described in Section 7.4. In addition, SSH access and outbound access must also be enabled through the Network Parameters menu, as described in Section 7.8.1.

• If you are connected via the network port, the /SSH command will not work.

Availability: Administrator, SuperUser, User Mode: /SSH-large[Enter]

where:ip is the destination IP address. The IP address can be entered in IPv4 or IPv6 format. -l (lowercase "L") Specifies that the next argument is the connection name. Username is the username you want to use to log in to the target device.

/BROADCAST Sends text or commands to serial ports

Sends text or commands to a user-selected DSM/CPM serial port.

Notes: • The transmit command only applies to serial ports configured for any-to-any or passive operation. Text or commands are not sent to modem or buffer mode ports.

• The broadcast command only applies to serial ports that are not currently connected. Text or commands are not sent to connected serial ports.

• Flow control (handshake) on the destination serial ports must be "ready" to receive texts or commands.

• The broadcast command does not send text or commands to the serial port that initiated the command.

• To exit broadcast mode and send text or commands, press [Esc] or type ^X ([Ctrl] plus [X].)

Availability: Administrator, SuperUserFormat: /BROADCAST[Enter]

where "portlist" is an array of port numbers or names separated by spaces or commas. Note that the port-list argument can also contain wildcards.

18-14

Command Reference Guide

18.3.3. configuration commands

/F Configure system parameters

Displays a menu for setting general system parameters for the DSM/CPM module. All the functionality provided by the /F command is also available through the web browser interface. See Section 7.2 for more information.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /F [Enter]

/P Sets the serial port parameters

Displays a menu to select parameters for the serial ports and the internal modem port. All the functionality provided by the /P command is also available through the web browser interface. Section 7.7 describes the procedure for setting serial port parameters.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /P[Enter]

existsthe number or name of the desired serial port.

/PL Plugin configuration

Displays a menu for selecting parameters for sockets (plugs). All the functionality provided by the /PL command is also available through the web browser interface. Section 7.6 describes the procedure for setting connection parameters.

Note: This command is not available on DSM series devices. The /PL command is only available on CPM series devices.

Availability: Admin Format: /PL [Enter]

/G Plug-in group parameters

Displays a menu for viewing, adding, modifying, or deleting connection application groups. See Section 7.5 for more information about connector pools.

Note: This command is not available on DSM series devices. The /G command is only available on CPM series devices.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /G [Enter]

/N* Network Selection Menu - IPv4/IPv6

Displays the Network Selection menu, which gives you access to the configuration menus for the primary Ethernet port, the optional secondary Ethernet port, and the optional cellular modem port. Note that the Network Selection menu also provides access to the configuration menus for the IPv4 and IPv6 protocols. All the functionality provided by the /N* command is also available through the web browser interface. See Section 7.8 for more information.

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /N* [Enter]

18-15

Command Reference Guide

/PNA configuration parameter no ping response (DSM series devices only)

Displays a menu used to specify IP addresses and other related parameters used by the no-answer alarm. If ping no answer IP addresses are set and the ping no answer alarm is enabled, DSM/CPM can ping custom IP addresses and notify you when devices at those IP addresses do not respond to the ping Response to command. See Section 9.4.1 for more information.

Note: This command is only available on DSM series devices. The /PNA command is not available on CPM series devices. Instead, the PingNoAnswer parameters are set through the Restart Options menu.

Availability: Admin Format: /PNA [Enter]

/RB reboot options

Displays a menu used to configure scheduled restarts and pings for unanswered restarts. Scheduled reboots allow devices connected to the outlets of a CPM series unit to reboot periodically on a user-defined schedule. Ping No-Answer Reboots allow the CPM Series device to automatically reboot specific sockets when a user-specified IP address does not respond to a ping command. See Section 8 for more information on restart options.

Notes: • This command is not available on DSM series devices. The /RB command is only available on CPM series devices.

• If required, the no-reply ping restart feature can also be configured to send an email notification when a no-reply ping restart is generated. See Section 9.4 for more information.

Availability: Admin Format: /RB [Enter]

/AC alarm configuration parameter

Displays a menu used to configure and enable DSM/CPM monitoring and alerting capabilities. See Section 9 for more information on alarm configuration.

Availability: Admin Format: /AC [Enter]

18-16

Command Reference Guide

/reboot system (default)

Re-initializes the DSM/CPM module and offers the option of keeping custom parameters or reverting to default parameters. As described in Sections 7.9.1 and 16.3, the /I command can also be used to restore the device to previously saved parameters. When the /I command is invoked, the device offers four reboot options:

• RebootOnly(DoNOTdefaultparameters)• Reboot&Default(KeepIPParameters&SSHKeysDefaultallotherparameters)• Reboot&Default(DefaultALLparameters)• Reboot&RestoreLastKnownWorkingConfiguration

Availability: AdministratorFormat: /I [Enter]

/UF firmware upgrade

When new DSM/CPM firmware versions are available, this command is used to update the existing firmware as described in Section 17.

Notes: • The firmware upgrade utility is the preferred method for managing DSM/CPM firmware upgrades. The /UF command is intended to provide an alternative to the WMU Enterprise Management Utility. See Section 17.1 for more information

• When a firmware upgrade is performed, DSM/CPM takes 15 minutes for the upgrade process.

Availability: Admin Format: /UF [Enter]

/CP Copy RS232 port parameters

Allows quick setup when configuring multiple serial ports with similar parameters. When the /CP command is invoked, DSM/CPM displays a menu that can be used to copy parameters to the RS232 ports. See Section 7.7.3 for more information.

Note: To continue with the copy function after selecting new parameters, press [Esc]. DSM/CPM will then display the confirmation message before continuing.

Availability: Administrator Format: /CP [Enter]

18-17

Command Reference Guide

/TEST Test network parameters

Displays a menu used to test the configuration of the syslog and SNMP trap functions, and can also be used to ping a user-selected IP address.

Notes:• For the Aping test to work properly, your network and/or firewall and the target device must be configured to allow ping commands.

• For the ping command to work with domain names, the domain name server parameters must be set as described in section 7.8.3.

• The test menu ping command is not affected by the status of the network parameters menu ping access mode.

Availability: Admin mode: /TEST [Enter]

Apx-1

Appendix A. Specifications

A'1. Typical devices of the DSM series

RS232 port interface: Connectors: • DSM-8 series models: Eight (8) RJ45 connectors (DTE pinout)

One (1) USB mini setup port • DSM-24 series models: Twenty-four (24) RJ45 connectors (DTE pinout)

One (1) USB mini setup port • DSM-40 series models: Forty (40) RJ45 connectors (DTE pinout)

Ein (1) USB-Mini-SetUp-Port

Encoding: 7/8 bit, Even, Odd, No parity, 1, 2 interrupt bits FlowControl: No activity timeout disconnects port/modem sessions.

Off, 5, 15, 30, 90 minutes.

Memory: Stores parameters and recorded data. 256 KB per port.

Pause: Send pause or block pause

Site ID: 32 characters.

PortName: 16 characters per port.

Usernames and passwords: 16 characters each (case sensitive). Up to 128 pairs.

LED: On, Ready, DCD and link activity for each RS232 serial port.

Natural/Environmental: Size: Width: 19 inches (48.3 cm) (including rack supports) Depth: 6.5 inches (16.5 cm) Height: 1.75 inches (4.5 cm) One Rack U

Power: • AC models: input IEC-320-C14, 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 10 watts maximum (Optional, secondary

IEC-320-C14 input available.)• DC Models: Terminal Block, -48 VDC

Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C (32°F to 122°F) Storage Temperature: -20°C to 70°C (-4°F to 128°F) Humidity: 10 to 90% RH non-condensing Ventilation : The side vents are used to dissipate the heat generated in the device. When assembling the device in a

Make sure there is sufficient space for ventilation.

ControlPorts:EthernetPort: 10/100/1000Base-T, RJ45, Multisession.

(An optional secondary 10/100/1000Base-T Ethernet port is also available.) Internal Modem Port (Telephone Line): (Optional) RJ11 jack for connection to your telecommunications line. Internal cellular modem port: (optional) 4G LTE for Verizon, AT&T or EU

Apx-2

Attachments

A'2. CPM series units

Power Input/Output: Voltage: CPM-1600-1 and CPM-800-1 Series: 100-120 VAC, 50/60 Hz. CPM-1600-2 and CPM-800-2 Series: 208-240 VAC, 50 / 60Hz

AC Input Power: CPM-1600 Series and CPM-800 Series: 20 amps maximum input power per input

Είσοδοι AC: CPM-1600 Series: Four (4) IEC320-C20CPM-800 Series: Two (2) IEC320-C20

AC Outlets:CPM-1600-1Series: 16 each, NEMA 5-15R OutletsCPM-1600-2Series: 16 each, IEC320-C13 OutletsCPM-800-1Series: 8 each, NEMA 5-15R Outlets80-2PMS-IEC320-C13 Outlets C13

RS232 Port Interface: Connectors: CPM-1600 Series: Sixteen (16) RJ45 connectors (DTE pinout). CPM-800 Series: Eight (8) RJ45 connectors (DTE pinout).

Coding: 7/8 bit, even, odd, no parity, 1, 2 stop bits. Flow control: XON/XOFF, RTS/CTS, both or neither. Data rate: 300 bps to 230 kbps (all standard speeds).

Internal Modem: CPM-1600 Series and CPM-800 Series: Internal Modem 56K v.92 (optional)

Natural/Environmental: CPM-1600 Series: Width: 19 inches (48.3 cm) (including rack mounts) Depth: 12.5 inches (31.75 cm) Height: 3.5 inches (8.9 cm)

CPM-800 Series: Width: 19 inches (48.3 cm) (including rack brackets) Depth: 8.75 inches (22.2 cm) Height: 1.75 inches (4.5 cm) One Rack U

Operating Temperature: 32˚F to 122˚F (0˚C to 50˚C) Humidity: 10 - 90% RHA Regulatory Approvals: FCC, UL, CE (240 VAC devices) Ventilation: Side vents are used to vent air produced in the device dissipates the heat. When assembling the device in a

Make sure there is sufficient space for ventilation.

ControlPorts:EthernetPort: 10/100/1000Base-T, RJ45, Multisession.

Apx-3

Appendix B. Serial Port Description

1 8

12345678

RTSDTRTXD

RXDDCDCTS

GNDGND

GND

DTE DSM ή CPM

Figure B.1: RS232 (RJ45) port interface of DSM series and CPM series

1 6

123456

Not usedNot used RING

It's not being used

TIP Not used

Figure B.2: RJ11PhoneLinePort (for optional internal modem)

B.1. Serial port (RS232)

The DCD and DTR hardware lines work as follows:

1. When connected:

a) If one of the ports is set to modem mode, the DTR output on one of the ports will mirror the DCD input on the other end.

b) If none of the ports are set to modem mode, the DTR output remains high (active).

2. If there is no connection:

a) If the port is set to modem mode, the DTR output is pulsed for 0.5 seconds and then held high when the connection is disconnected.

b) If the port is not set to modem mode, the DTR output is controlled by the DTR Output option (Serial Port Parameters menu, option 23). Once disconnected, option 23 allows the DTR output to be held low, high, or pulsed for 0.5 seconds and then held high.

Apx-4

Attachments

B 2. DSM and CPM RJ45 serial ports

When connecting devices to DSM series or CPM series RJ45 serial console ports, refer to Figure B.1 and the following table:

Targeting Device Terminal Adapter Cable WTI Device End

RJSerialConsolePorts: Cisco routers, Juniper routers, and other network devices with an RJ45 serial console port

(Not required) RJ45 rollover cable: RJ-ROLL (7 feet) RJ-ROLL-25 (25 feet)

WTI DSM Series or CPM Series – RJ45, DCE console serial jack

DB9MSerialConsolePorts: Linux PC or Linux laptop, WTI RSM series modules, WTI MPC series modules and other devices with a DB9M serial console port

DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap-Adapter

RJ45 straight cable: RJX-7 (7 feet) RJX-15 (15 feet) RJX-25 (25 feet) RJX-50 (50 feet)

DB25FSerialConsolePorts:Terminal/DTE and other devices with a DB25F serial console port

DX25M-DTE-RJ Snap-Adapter

RJ45 straight cable: RJX-7 (7 feet) RJX-15 (15 feet) RJX-25 (25 feet) RJX-50 (50 feet)

Note: For RJ45 console ports on target devices that are not connected to a Cisco interface, try a standard straight Cat5 cable. For all other non-standard interfaces, contact WTI Technical Support and provide serial pinout and signal instructions for the target interface.

Apx-5

Appendix C. Connecting Devices to RJ45 Serial Ports

This section describes the cables and adapters used to connect common devices to the RJ-45 serial ports on a standard DSM Series or CPM Series device. For information on other WTI cables and adapters, see the Serial Cables and Adapters document, which can be found on the WTI website at:

http://www.wti.com/guides/serialcables+adapters.pdf

C.1. Straight RJ-45 cables and twisted RJ-45 cables

The connection examples described in this section include the use of either a straight-through RJ-45 cable or an RJ-45 crossover cable. The difference between the two types of cables is the way the pins on the connectors at each end of the cable are connected together.

With straight cables, the pins on each plug connect to the same number of pins on the connector at the other end of the cable. For example, pin 1 on the right connector is connected to pin 1 on the left connector, as shown in Figure C.1 below.

With flip cables, the order of the pins is reversed. Pin 1 on the right connector will connect to pin 8 on the left connector as shown in Figure C.2.

WTI RJ-45 straight cables are available in three different models:

• RJX-7-15:15FeetLong• RJX-7-25:25FeetLong• RJX-7-30:30FeetLong

WTI also offers an RJ-45 breakout cable:

• RJ-ROLL

Pin 1

Pin 8

Pin 1

Pin 8

Figure C.1: Straight cables

Pin 1

Pin 8

Pin 1

Figure C.2: Overturn cable

Apx-6

Attachments

C.2. Connecting DB-9M DTE devices

The DX9F-DTE-RJ snap adapter can be used with a straight RJ-45 cable to connect the following DB-9M DTE devices to the RJ-45 serial ports of DSM series and CPM series devices:

• PCs and laptops • Console ports on WTIMPC series devices • Other devices with a DB-9MDTE console port

When connecting a DB-9M DTE device to an RJ-45 serial port on a DSM series or CPM series device, please refer to Figure C.3 and Figure C.4 below:

RJ-45 DB-9FPin No. Pin Nr. signal

5 X

CTS

DCD

RXD

TXD

GND

DTR

RTS

Pin 8 Pin 1

Pin 1

Female

Figure C.3: DX9F-DTE-RJSnap adapter interface

DSM or CPM series unit

RJ-45 DCE serial port

RJ-45 straight cable

DB-9M DTE-Konsolenport

DX9F-DTE-RJ Snap-Adapter

PC, laptop or other

Device with DB-9M DTE

interface

Figure C.4: Connecting DB-9MDTE devices to DSM and CPM series units

Apx-7

Attachments

C.3. Connecting DB-25F DTE devices

The DX25M-DTE-RJ snap adapter can be used with a straight RJ-45 cable to connect most DB-25F DTE devices to RJ-45 serial ports on DSM series or CPM series devices.

When connecting a DB-25F DTE device to an RJ-45 serial port on a DSM Series or CPM Series device, refer to Figure C.5 and Figure C.6 below:

RJ-45 DB-25MPPin-No. Pin-Nr. signal

5 X

CTS

DCD

TXD

RXD

GND

DTR

RTS

Pin 8 Pin 1

Pin 1

Masculine

Figure C.5: DX25M-DTE-RJSnap adapter interface

DSM or CPMS Series unit

RJ-45 DCE serial port

RJ-45 straight cable

DB-25F DTE Serial Port

DX25M-DTE-RJ Snap-Adapter

Devices with DB-25F

DTE interface

Figure C.6: Connecting DB-25FDTE devices to DSMCPM series units

Apx-8

Attachments

C.4. Connection of DB-25F DCE devices

The DX25M-DCE-RJ snap adapter can be used with a straight RJ-45 cable to connect the following DB-25F DCE devices to RJ-45 serial ports on DSM Series and CPM Series devices:

• External modems with serial port DB-25FDCE. • Other devices with DB-25FDCE console port

When connecting a DB-25F DCE device to an RJ-45 serial port on a DSM Series or CPM Series device, refer to Figure C.7 and Figure C.8 below:

RJ-45 DB-25MPPin-No. Pin-Nr. signal

5 X

RTS

DTR

RXD

TXD

GND

DCD

CTS

Pin 8 Pin 1

Pin 1

Masculine

Figure C.7: DX25M-DCE-RJ Snap Adapter Interface

DSM or CPMS Series unit

RJ-45 DCE serial port

RJ-45 straight cable

DB-25F DCE serial port

DX25M-DCE-RJ Schnappadapter

External modem or

Another device with DB-25F

DCE interface

Figure C.8: Connecting DB-25F DCE units to DSM and CPM series units

Apx-9

Attachments

C.5. Connection of RJ-45 DCE devices

An RJ-ROLL rollover cable can be used to connect the following RJ-45 DCE devices to the RJ-45 serial ports of DSM Series or CPM Series devices:

• Cisco Routers with RJ-45DCE console port • SunRouters with RJ-45DCE console port • Other devices with RJ-45DCE console port

When connecting an RJ-45 DCE device to an RJ-45 serial port on DSM Series or CPM Series devices, please refer to Figure C.9 below:

DSM or CPMS Series unit

RJ-45 DCE serial port

RJ-45 breakout cable

Cisco-Router my serial RJ-45-DCE-Port,

Sun router or other device

with RJ-45 DCE interface

Figure C.9: Connecting RJ-45DCED devices to DSM and CPM series units

Γ.6. DX9F-NULL-RJ Snap-Adapter

The DX9F-NULL-RJ snap adapter is used for direct cable connections (pins 2 to 8).

Figure C.10: DX9F-NULL-RJSnapAdapterInterface

RJ-45 DB-9FPin No. Pin Nr. signal

5 X

RTS

DTR

TXD

RXD

GND

DSR

CTS

Pin 8 Pin 1

Pin 1

Female

Apx-10

Appendix D. Customer Service

Customer service hours are 8:00 A.M. to 5:00 p.m. PST, Monday through Friday. When you call, give the name and brand of the device, its serial number, and a description of its symptoms. If the unit must be returned for factory repair, it must be accompanied by a return authorization number from Customer Service.

STI Customer Service £5

Irvine, CA 92618

Local phone number: (949) 586-9950. Toll Free Hotline: 1-888-280-7227

Service-Fax: (949) 583-9514

E-MAIL:[emailprotected]

Apx-11

Attachments

Trademark and copyright information

WTI and Western Telematic are trademarks of Western Telematic Inc. All other product names mentioned in this publication are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies.

The information and descriptions contained herein are the property of Western Telematic Inc.. Such information and descriptions may not be copied, distributed or disseminated without the express written consent of Western Telematic Inc.

July 2017 Part Number: 14446 Revision: D

Trademarks and copyrights used in this manual

Cisco and EnergyWise are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems, Inc.

Telnet is a trademark of Telnet Communications, Inc.

VeriSign is a registered trademark of VeriSign, Incorporated

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective owners.

FAQs

What is WTI default IP address? ›

IP network. The default IP Address is 192.168. 168.168, for more information, please refer to Section 5.3. 4.

What is a WTI console? ›

WTI's TSM Series console servers provide secure, remote access to RS232 console ports on servers, routers, switches, firewalls and other network elements. This allows system administrators to manage and troubleshoot network devices from anywhere.

See Details ›

What is the default IP address of your network? ›

Network devices are set to a single default IP address; for example, Linksys routers are typically assigned an IP address of 192.168. 1.1. The default address is left intact by most users, but can be changed to suit a more complex network architecture. See default gateway and IP address.

Keep Reading ›

What is my default IP address? ›

Step 1: Click on Start (Windows logo) or press the WIN on your keyboard. Step 2: Search for “cmd” and hit ENTER to launch the command prompt. Step 3: Right inside the command prompt, type in “ipconfig” and hit Enter. The number assigned to “Default Gateway” is your router's IP address.

Get More Info ›

What is the default password for WTI devices? ›

Factory default Username/Password

WTI devices ship from the factory with a single account enabled: Username: super. Password: super.

Keep Reading ›

What is the console port on a network switch? ›

The console port is used to connect a computer directly to a Gigabit Ethernet switch and manage the switch since there is no display device for the switch. In most cases, it is the very first step to configure your network switch. Here are the detailed steps of logging in to a network switch via the console port.

Tell Me More ›

What is console porting? ›

A "console port" is a game that was originally made for a console before an identical version is created which can be played on a personal computer. This term has been widely used by the gaming community.

Does my network have an IP address? ›

You can find your local IP address on Windows via Start > Settings > Network & internet > Wi-Fi. Click Show available networks, select the Wi-Fi network you're connected to, click properties, and look for your IP address listed next to IPv4 address.

Tell Me More ›

What is the most common IP address for a router? ›

Most routers use an address of 192.168.1.1, but that's not always the case, so you may first want to confirm the address of your router. To find your router's IP address, type cmd in the Windows search bar open the Command Prompt. Type ipconfig and run the command.

What is the most common router login? ›

#2) Generally, for most of the routers, the default username and password is “admin” and “admin”. However, these credentials may vary depending upon the maker of the router.

How do I see all my IP addresses? ›

First, click on your Start Menu and type cmd in the search box and press enter. A black and white window will open where you will type ipconfig /all and press enter. There is a space between the command ipconfig and the switch of /all. Your ip address will be the IPv4 address.

Get More Info Here ›

Which IP setting is best for Wi-Fi? ›

Some of the most trustworthy, high-performance DNS public resolvers and their IPv4 DNS addresses include:

Cisco OpenDNS: 208.67. 222.222 and 208.67. 220.220;
Cloudflare 1.1. 1.1: 1.1. 1.1 and 1.0. 0.1;
Google Public DNS: 8.8. 8.8 and 8.8. 4.4; and.
Quad9: 9.9. 9.9 and 149.112. 112.112.

Sep 23, 2019

Explore More ›

Does each Wi-Fi have an IP address? ›

Your internet service provider (ISP) assigns IP addresses to your internet-connected devices, and every IP address is unique. Considering every single internet-connected device has an IP address, billions of IP addresses exist.

Show Me More ›

What is the default APC user password? ›

The default user name and password are both apc. A Device User has read and write access to device-related screens. Administrative functions like session management under the Security menu and Firewall under Logs are greyed out. The default user name is device, and the default password is apc.

Read On ›

What is the default cisco AP username and password? ›

The default username is Cisco. Step 4 Enter the wireless device password in the Password field and press Enter. The default password is Cisco.

Discover More ›

What is the default password for air ap1832i e K9? ›

According to our database the default username of your Cisco AIR-AP3802I-A-K9 router is Cisco and the corresponding password is Cisco.

Explore More ›

Is console port the same as Ethernet port? ›

What matters most about console cables is the specific nature of the connection. This is not an Ethernet or networking connection. It is a terminal connection, and its purpose is to enable the connected computer to configure the networking device. This is true for older Cisco equipment and brand-new devices.

Read On ›

What is the difference between console port and management port? ›

A management port can be used for remote management and configuration of a networking device, where as the Console Port can be used, in conjunction with a console server, such as Lantronix SLC 8000, to implement a separate dedicated network to access the network devices in case the primary network goes down.

Is console port the same as management port? ›

the console port is for serial management. Usually directly to your laptop or via an console server. The management port is a physical port which can be assigned an IP either via DHCP or static for out-of-band management of the switch.

Read The Full Story ›

What happens when you port your SIM? ›

Once the port has been processed, the request is submitted to the carrier to release the phone number. The time required to release the number varies from provider to provider. The average time to complete a port request from the date of submission is 5-10 business days.

Discover More Details ›

How do I use SIM port? ›

Step 1– Send an SMS in the following format- PORT followed by space <Mobile number you wish to port> to 1900. Step 2- The existing mobile number operator will respond with an 8-digit UPC (Unique Porting Code) on your registered mobile number.

Find Out More ›

How do I enable console ports? ›

Connect the console port on the switch to the serial port on the computer using a console cable, or connect the USB-C port on the switch to the USB-C port on the computer using a USB-C cable.
Start the terminal emulation software on the computer and configure a new serial session with the following settings:

More items...

Show Me More ›

What is the default password for WTI console? ›

Escape character is '^]'. When you are prompted, log in by typing the password. The default WTI password is password .

Learn More ›

Is 192.0 0.0 a public IP? ›

192.0. 0.0 - IP address is in a reserved range. Private IP Address Ranges Address ranges below are reserved by IANA for private intranets, and not routable to the Internet. For additional information, see RFC 1918.

Get More Info ›

What is my source IP and destination IP? ›

Source IP address - the IP packet field containing the IP address of the workstation from which it came. Destination IP address - the IP packet field containing the IP address of the workstation to which it is addressed.

Get More Info Here ›

What is the default IP of cisco? ›

Most routers and switches by Cisco have default passwords of admin or cisco, and default IP addresses of 192.168. 1.1 or 192.168. 1.254.

Discover More ›

What is the default password for Web console? ›

The default credentials are admin and password .

What is the default password Ranger? ›

Ranger Admin user -- The credentials for this user are set in Configs > Advanced ranger-env in the fields labeled admin_username (default value: admin ) and admin_password (default value: admin ).

Learn More ›

What is the default admin login for Harbor? ›

The default Harbor user name is admin . Both the user name and password can be changed after installation using the Harbor web interface.

Discover More ›

What are the 3 private IP addresses? ›

Private Address Ranges

Class A: 10.0. 0.0 to 10.255. 255.255.
Class B: 172.16. 0.0 to 172.31. 255.255.
Class C: 192.168. 0.0 to 192.168. 255.255.

Know More ›

How can I tell if an IP address is public or private? ›

To check if your IP address is public, you can use myip.com (or any similar service). You will be shown the IP address that was used for accessing the site; and if it matches the IP address that your Internet service provider assigned you, then you have a public IP address.

Tell Me More ›

How do I know if my IP is public or private online? ›

The way to tell is to reference a standard used by TCP/IP:

An IPv4 address beginning with any of the following is a private address: 172.16., 172.17., 172.18, etc up to 172.30. and 172.31. 192.168.
Otherwise it's a public IPv4 address (with a few minor exceptions)

Aug 23, 2022

Get More Info Here ›

How do I trace an IP source? ›

How to Trace an IP Address Using Command Prompt

Step 1: Open the Command Prompt Window. ...
Step 2: Enter the IP Address. ...
Step 3: Trace the IP Address. ...
Step 4: Identify the Location. ...
Step 5: Repeat the Process. ...
Step 1: Log into your Gmail account.
Step 2: Select the email you want to trace the IP address for.

More items...

Apr 28, 2023

Show Me More ›

What does source IP mean port forwarding? ›

Source IP—The source IP address for traffic from which traffic is forwarded (Any, Single Address or Address Range). Destination IP—The IP address of the server to which traffic is forwarded. Internal Port—To which port traffic will be forwarded.

Read The Full Story ›

How to list all IP addresses on network using cmd? ›

On Windows, type the command “ipconfig” and press Return. Get more information by typing the command “arp -a.” You should now see a basic list of the IP addresses for devices connected to your network.

Tell Me More ›

What is a router's default gateway? ›

The default gateway is the path used to pass information when the device doesn't know where the destination is. More directly, a default gateway is a router that connects your host to remote network segments. It's the exit point for all the packets in your network that have destinations outside your network.

Get More Info Here ›

Is IPv4 my IP address? ›

Click on “Start”, then “Settings”, “Network & internet”, “Wi-Fi”. Select the network you're connected to. Click on “Properties.” Scroll down to the bottom of the window — your IP will be shown next to “IPv4 address.”

Serial Console Servers - WTI › Guides › dsm_usersguide.pdf · 2017-07-26 · No. part of WTI. 14446 Rev. D DSM Series CPM Remote Site Managers with Power - [PDF Document] (2023)

FAQs

What is WTI default IP address? ›

How do I see all my IP addresses? ›

How do I use SIM port? ›

How can I tell if an IP address is public or private? ›

References